summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc')
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Appendix_Font_Tables.tex82
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_User.tex1274
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_gregorio.tex854
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_internal.tex1587
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Gabc.tex207
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioNabcRef-4_0_0-beta2.pdfbin0 -> 274464 bytes
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioNabcRef.tex1249
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef-4_0_0-beta2.pdfbin0 -> 479456 bytes
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef.lua296
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef.tex188
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Makefile.am58
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/factus.gabc17
-rw-r--r--Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/veni.gabc21
13 files changed, 5833 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Appendix_Font_Tables.tex b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Appendix_Font_Tables.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d5e2c4cabbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Appendix_Font_Tables.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+% !TEX root = GregorioRef.tex
+% !TEX program = LuaLaTeX
+\begin{landscape}
+
+\section{Font Glyph Tables}\label{glyphtable}
+
+\subsection{Score Font Glyphs}
+
+The following table lists all of the score glyphs available in the greciliae,
+gregorio, and parmesan fonts, and any variant glyphs contained within. If a
+variant glyph is unavailable in a given font, it will be listed as
+{\itshape\small N/A} under the appropriate column. Some of the glyphs listed
+are representative of sets of glyphs differentiated by the ambitus of the
+component notes. These are listed with English words for the numbers in
+italics, such as {\itshape TwoTwo}. The gabc column lists a gabc sequence that
+uses the given glyph. If there are small, slanted characters, such as
+\excluded{gege} in this column, they produce glyphs additional to the given
+glyph, but are necessary for the given glyph to appear. Note: glyphs for the
+horizontal episema (activated using {\ttfamily\char`_} in gabc) are excluded from
+this table.
+
+\newcommand\ScoreFontTable[1]{%
+ \begin{longtable}{llccccccc}
+ \caption{Score Glyphs}\\
+ &&&&&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bfseries Variants}\\
+ \hhline{>{\arrayrulecolor{lightgray}}----->{\arrayrulecolor{black}}----}
+ {\bfseries Glyph Name}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries gabc}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries greciliae}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries gregorio}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries parmesan}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries Name}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries greciliae}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries gregorio}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries parmesan}\\
+ \hline
+ \endfirsthead
+ &&&&&\multicolumn{4}{c}{\bfseries Variants}\\
+ \hhline{>{\arrayrulecolor{lightgray}}----->{\arrayrulecolor{black}}----}
+ {\bfseries Glyph Name}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries gabc}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries greciliae}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries gregorio}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries parmesan}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries Name}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries greciliae}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries gregorio}&%
+ {\scriptsize\bfseries parmesan}\\
+ \hline
+ \endhead
+ \directlua{GregorioRef.emit_score_glyphs(#1)}
+ \end{longtable}
+}%
+\ScoreFontTable{'greciliae','gregorio','parmesan'}
+
+\subsection{Dominican Score Font Glyphs}
+
+The following table lists all of the score glyphs available in the Dominican
+versions of the greciliae, gregorio, and parmesan fonts in the same vein as
+the prior table.
+
+\ScoreFontTable{'greciliaeOp','gregorioOp','parmesanOp'}
+
+\subsection{Extra Glyphs}\label{subsec:greextra}
+
+The following table lists the glyphs available in the greextra font. There are
+score glyphs which may be substituted into the score, text glyphs meant to be
+used in the verses or in the \TeX{} document, and miscellaneous glyphs like
+decorative lines for more specialized use.
+
+\begin{longtable}{lc|lc}
+ \caption{Extra Glyphs}\\
+ {\bfseries Glyph Name}&{\bfseries Glyph}&{\bfseries Glyph Name}&{\bfseries Glyph}\\
+ \hline
+ \endfirsthead
+ {\bfseries Glyph Name}&{\bfseries Glyph}&{\bfseries Glyph Name}&{\bfseries Glyph}\\
+ \hline
+ \endhead
+ \directlua{GregorioRef.emit_extra_glyphs('greextra')}
+\end{longtable}
+
+\end{landscape}
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_User.tex b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_User.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..15d1760e935
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_User.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1274 @@
+% !TEX root = GregorioRef.tex
+% !TEX program = LuaLaTeX+se
+\section{User Controls}
+
+These functions are available to the user to customize elements of the
+score which cannot be controlled from the gabc file. They can be added
+to any \verb=.tex= file. Do not add them to any \verb=.gtex= or
+\verb=.gabc= file.
+
+\subsection{Using the Package}
+
+To use the Gregorio\TeX\ package, include \verb=\usepackage{gregoriotex}=
+in the document preamble. This macro has the following form:
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash usepackage}{[\optional{(options)}]\{gregoriotex\}}{gregoriotex.sty}
+
+The optional arguments are:
+
+\bigskip\rowcolors{1}{lightgray}{lightgray}
+\begin{tabular}{lp{10cm plus .5cm}}
+ Argument & Description \\
+ \hline
+ debug & Debug messages will be printed to the output log. \\
+ \hline
+ nevercompile & Default. The classic behavior of Gregorio\TeX. The user is %
+ responsible for compiling gabc scores into gtex files.\\
+ autocompile & Gregorio\TeX\ will automatically compile gtex files from gabc %
+ files when necessary. If the gabc has been modified, or the %
+ gtex has an outdated version, or the gtex file does not exist, %
+ THEN Gregorio\TeX\ will compile a new gtex file.\\
+ forcecompile & Gregorio\TeX\ will compile all scores from their gabc files.\\
+ \hline
+ deprecated=false & Force all deprecated commands to raise a package error %
+ rather than a warning. This allows the user to ensure that their file is %
+ compliant with the current version of Gregorio\TeX.\\
+\end{tabular}\bigskip
+
+\textbf{Note:} \verb=nevercompile=, \verb=autocompile=, and
+\verb=forcecompile= conflict with eachother. Only one should be
+specified in the options list.\bigskip
+
+\textbf{Important:} Gregorio\TeX{} may require up to two passes (runs of
+\texttt{lualatex}) to compute the line heights correctly. If a second
+pass is required, Gregorio\TeX{} will emit the following
+warning:\par\medskip
+
+\begin{scriptsize}
+\begin{latexcode}
+Module gregoriotex warning: Line heights or variable brace lengths may have changed. Rerun to fix.
+\end{latexcode}
+\end{scriptsize}
+
+Gregorio\TeX{} two-pass processing is compatible with \texttt{latexmk}.
+
+\subsection{Commands}
+
+In general, commands should not be modified. Exceptions are noted below.
+
+\subsubsection{Including scores}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gregorioscore}{[\optional{\#1}]\{\#2\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for including scores. Works on both gabc and tex files.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \texttt{n} & Optional. \#2 will be included as is. \\
+ & \texttt{a} & Optional. Gregorio\TeX\ will automatically compile gabc files if necessary.\\
+ & \texttt{f} & Optional. Forces Gregorio\TeX\ to compile the gabc file.\\
+ \#2 & string & Relative or absolute path to the score.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+Example:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \includescore[n]{TecumPrincipium.tex}
+ \includescore{Chant/VirgoVirginum.gabc}
+ \includescore{/home/user/chant/AdTeLevavi}
+ \includescore[a]{AveMaria}
+
+ %The following lines include the same score:
+ \includescore{Christus}
+ \includescore{Christus.gtex}
+ \includescore{./Christus}
+ \includescore{./Christus.gabc}
+
+ %With the optional arg [f], #2 must be a file usable by TeX.
+ \includescore[f]{TecumPrincipium.gabc} % Wrong
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\textbf{Important:} For the sake of clarity it is recommended that the
+file extension be omitted from \texttt{\#2}. When the nevercompile
+option is in effect (either via package option
+\texttt{[nevercompile]}, or \verb=\gresetcompilegabc{never}=, or
+\verb=\includescore[n]=) \#2 must be a \TeX\ file that exists and
+\texttt{.tex} is the only extension that may be omitted.
+
+When called with the optional argument \texttt{[a]} Gregorio\TeX\ will
+automatically generate a \texttt{gtex} file in this format:
+\texttt{\textit{scorename}-x\_x\_x.gtex} where \texttt{x\_x\_x} is the
+gregorio version. This resulting file is not intended to be modified
+by the user and will be removed when the gabc file is recompiled. The
+rules that Gregorio\TeX uses to determine if a gabc file needs to be
+compiled are:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If a gtex file does not exist.
+\item If the modification time of the gabc file is newer than its
+ corresponding gtex file.
+\item If the version of the gtex file is outdated.
+\end{itemize}
+
+When called with the optional argument \texttt{[n]} Gregorio\TeX\ will
+include the score without doing anything else. This is the same as the
+old behavior of Gregorio\TeX and the default behavior.
+
+When called with the optional argument \texttt{[f]} Gregorio\TeX will
+compile the gabc file into a gtex file. This is similar to
+\texttt{[a]} except the gabc is compiled every time.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetcompilegabc}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A macro to change the behavior of the way Gregorio\TeX\ includes scores. This is similar to using the package options \verb=[forcecompile]=, \verb=[autocompile]=, and \verb=[nevercompile]=, but does not necessarly apply to the entire document.
+
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & force & all later calls of \verb=\includescore= will compile the gabc
+file into a gtex file.\\
+ & auto & all later calls of \verb=\includescore= will use Gregorio\TeX's
+automatic compilation of gabc files.\\
+ & never & all later calls of \verb=\includescore= will include the score
+without doing anything else.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\medskip This macro can be combined in the same document with different arguments to
+switch between different includescore behaviors: \par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \usepackage{gregoriotex} % [nevercompile] is the default.
+ ----
+ \includescore{TecumPrincipium} % gabc never compiled.
+ \includescore[f]{TecumPrincipium} % gabc always compiled.
+ \includescore[a]{TecumPrincipium} % gabc auto compiled.
+
+ \gresetcompilegabc{auto}
+ \includescore{TecumPrincipium} % gabc auto compiled.
+ \includescore[n]{TecumPrincipium} % gabc never compiled.
+ \includescore[f]{TecumPrincipium} % gabc always compiled.
+
+ \gresetcompilegabc{force}
+ \includescore{TecumPrincipium} % gabc always compiled.
+ \includescore[n]{TecumPrincipium} % gabc never compiled.
+ \includescore[a]{TecumPrincipium} % gabc auto compiled.
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gabcsnippet}{[\optional{\#1}]\{\#2\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Converts the gabc notation specified in \texttt{\#2} to Gregorio\TeX\ and
+includes it directly in the document. The optional argument \texttt{[\#1]}
+may be used to specify a gabc \texttt{initial-style}, which defaults to
+\texttt{1}.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & number & Optional. The gabc \texttt{initial-style} value to use.\\
+ \#2 & string & The gabc to insert into the document.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\medskip For example:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \gabcsnippet[0]{(c3) Al(eg~)le(gv.fhg)lu(efe___)ia(e.) (::)}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Point-and-click}
+
+Gregorio can add Lilypond-like point-and-click links into the output PDF
+file. The URLs added to the PDF conform with Lilypond and will use the
+Lilypond scripts if they are enabled on your system. To configure your
+system for this feature, please see the documentation for Lilypond since
+they established the feature.\bigskip
+
+In addition to switching this feature on in \TeX{}, you must also pass the
+\texttt{-p} option to \texttt{gregorio} when converting your gabc files to
+Gregorio\TeX{} for inclusion. This will automatically be done for auto- and
+force-compiled scores, but if an auto-compiled score was compiled without the
+option, Gregorio\TeX{} will not realize it has changed to recompile it. In
+this case, remove the corresponding \texttt{.gtex} file to force it to
+recompile.\bigskip
+
+\textbf{Important:} As with LilyPond, you should always turn off
+point-and-click before producing gtex and/or PDF files for distribution.
+This feature embeds absolute filenames from your computer as links in
+the PDF, which can pose a security risk. This is why this feature is
+disabled by default.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetpointandclick}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to enable or disable the point-and-click feature.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & on & Enable point-and-click link generation.\\
+ & off & Disable point-and-click link generation.
+\end{argtable}
+
+This feature may be switched on and off as desired between scores.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Overall Size}
+While the default size for Gregorio scores is designed to approximate that found in most liturgical books, Gregorio\TeX\ also provides mechanisms for changing the size of your scores for use in any application.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grechangestaffsize}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to adjust the size of the staff.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & The size of the staff lines. Default value is 17. Higher numbers yield larger staves.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grechangestafflinethickness}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to adjust the thickness of the staff lines.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & The thickness of the staff lines. The default value is same as staff size.
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Fine Tuning Dimensions}
+In addition to providing control over the overall size of your scores, Gregorio\TeX\ allows you to fine tune the spacings around and between the various elements using the following functions.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grecreatedim}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}\{\#3\}}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to create one of Gregorio\TeX’s distances. Used to initialize distances in a space configuration file.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The name of the distance to be changed. See \nameref{distances} below.\\
+ \#2 & string & The distance in string format. \textbf{Note:} You cannot use a length register for this argument. You \emph{must} use a string because of the way that Gregorio\TeX\ handles spaces.\\
+ \#3 & 0 & Distance will not scale when staff size is changed.\\
+ & 1 & Distance will scale when staff size is changed.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grechangedim}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}\{\#3\}}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to change one of Gregorio\TeX’s distances. This function will check to make sure the distance you are trying to change exists first.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The name of the distance to be changed. See \nameref{distances} below.\\
+ \#2 & string & The distance in string format. \textbf{Note:} You cannot use a length register for this argument. You \emph{must} use a string because of the way that Gregorio\TeX\ handles spaces.\\
+ \#3 & 0 & Distance will not scale when staff size is changed.\\
+ & 1 & Distance will scale when staff size is changed.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grescaledim}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to turn on or off scaling with the staff size for a particular distance.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The name of the distance for which scaling it to changed. See \nameref{distances} below.\\
+ \#2 & \texttt{yes}/\texttt{true}/\texttt{on} & Scale the distance when changing the size of the staff.\\
+ & \textit{other} & Do not scale the distance when changing the size of the staff.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greloadspaceconf}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to load a space configuration file. Space configuration file names have the format \verb=gsp-identifier.tex= and must be in the same directory as your project or in your texmf directory. This function is \texttt{gre}-prefixed to highlight that it only loads distances for Gregorio\TeX.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The identifier of the space configuration file.
+\end{argtable}
+
+Example:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ % loads gsp-default.tex, the default configuration file
+ \greloadspaceconf{default}
+ % loads a custom configuration called gsp-myspaces.tex
+ \greloadspaceconf{myspaces}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greconffactor}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+A count which indicates the staff size that a space configuration file is designed for. Each space configuration file must have this value set as Gregorio\TeX\ will compare it to the current staff size to determine if the configuration file being loaded needs to be rescaled.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetlineheightexpansion}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to configure line height expansion behavior when notes appear
+above or below the staff lines.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \texttt{variable} & Expand lines within a score independently
+ of each other \\
+ & \texttt{uniform} & Expand all lines within a score uniformly
+\end{argtable}
+
+By default, Gregorio\TeX{} uses \texttt{variable} line expansion. This
+produces output similar to modern liturgical books. However, this
+feature imposes a slight performance impact and typically requires a
+second pass (run of \texttt{lualatex}) to get the heights right.\bigskip
+
+The older behavior of Gregorio\TeX{}, \texttt{uniform} line expansion,
+does not have this performance impact. However, the extra space it adds
+below the staff lines may look out-of-place in a section where there are
+no notes below the staff lines.\bigskip
+
+This behavior may be switched as needed within a \TeX{} document and
+affects all the scores which follow. However, if \texttt{variable} line
+expansion is enabled anywhere in the document, the second pass will be
+necessary.
+
+\begin{small}
+\begin{framed}
+ \textit{For experts only:}\bigskip
+
+ It is possible to suppress the line height computation and just use
+ whatever has been computed from the previous run. If you are sure
+ that the score line heights haven't changed from the previous run,
+ define the \verb=\greskipheightcomputation= control sequence before
+ including the Gregorio\TeX{} package. This will save a little bit
+ of time per run.
+\end{framed}
+\end{small}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Staff Lines}
+
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetlinecolor}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Macro for changing the color of the staff lines. The two most common colors you're going to want to use are \texttt{gregoriocolor} (see \nameref{colors}) and \texttt{black} (the default).
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \textit{color name} & The color of the staff lines
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetlines}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for setting whether the staff lines should be rendered or not.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & visible & The staff lines should be printed (default)\\
+ & invisible & The staff lines should not be printed
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetlinesbehindpunctumcavum}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for setting whether the staff lines behind a punctum cavum should be shown or not.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & visible & The staff lines behind a punctum cavum should be printed (default)\\
+ & invisible & The staff lines behind a punctum cavum should not be printed
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetlinesbehindalteration}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for setting whether the staff lines behind an alternation (\ie, an accidental) should be shown or not.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & visible & The staff lines behind an alteration should be printed (default)\\
+ & invisible & The staff lines behind an alteration should not be printed
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Score Font}
+Gregorio\TeX\ currently supports 3 different fonts for the glyphs in a score (neumes, clefs, alterations, \etc): Greciliae (a customized version of Caeciliae by Fr.\ Matthew Spencer, OSJ), Gregorio, and Parmesan (developed for Lilypond by Juergen Reuter).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetgregoriofont}{[\optional{\#1}]\{\#2\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Set the font used for the neumes. The optional argument \texttt{[\#1]}
+may be used to specify an alternate font/rule set. Currently, the only
+available alternate font/rule set is \texttt{op} for Dominican neumes.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \textit{(omitted)} & Use the normal font and rule set (default).\\
+ & op & Use the alternate Dominican font/rule set.\\
+ \#2 & greciliae & Use the Greciliae font (default).\\
+ & gregorio & Use the Gregorio font.\\
+ & parmesan & Use the Parmesan font.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Glyph Alteration}
+In addition to the normal glyphs loaded by the choice of font, Gregorio\TeX\ also supports several methods for fine tuning the choice of glyphs. Using the below functions, you can choose from alternative glyphs which are already built into Gregorio\TeX\ or import custom glyphs you have designed yourself.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grechangeglyph}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}\{\#3\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Substitutes the given Gregorio\TeX\ score glyph with the specified glyph
+from the specified font.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The name of the GregorioTeX glyph to replace.\\
+ \#2 & string & The name of the font to use.\\
+ \#3 & number & The code point of the glyph to use.\\
+ & \texttt{.}string & The name of the variant (appended to \#1) to use.\\
+ & string & (any other string) The name of the glyph to use.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\medskip If \texttt{\#1} has a wildcard (a \texttt{*}) in it, then
+\texttt{\#3} must start with a dot and all glyphs matching \texttt{\#1}
+will be replaced with corresponding glyphs whose names have \texttt{\#3}
+appended.
+
+\medskip If \texttt{\#2} is \texttt{*}, then the substitution is assumed
+to be available in all score fonts.
+
+\medskip For example, to use the old glyphs (from Caeciliae) for the
+strophicus, use the following:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \grechangeglyph{Stropha}{greciliae}{.caeciliae}
+ \grechangeglyph{StrophaAucta}{greciliae}{.caeciliae}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\medskip To replace all torculus resupinus glyphs with their alternate
+versions, use the following:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \grechangeglyph{TorculusResupinus*}{*}{.alt}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greresetglyph}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Removes a GregorioTeX score glyph substitution, restoring it back to
+its original form.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The name of the GregorioTeX glyph to restore.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\medskip If \texttt{\#1} has a wildcard (a \texttt{*}) in it, then
+all glyphs matching \texttt{\#1} will be restored.
+
+\medskip For example, to restore the strophicus back to the new glyphs,
+use the following:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \greresetglyph{Stropha}
+ \greresetglyph{StrophaAucta}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\medskip To restore all torculus resupinus glyphs to their original
+form, use the following:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \greresetglyph{TorculusResupinus*}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gredefsymbol}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}\{\#3\}}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+Defines (or redefines) a TeX control sequence to be a non-score symbol.
+If defined this way, the symbol will scale with the text font.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The name of the TeX control sequence (without leading backslash).\\
+ \#2 & string & The name of the font to use.\\
+ \#3 & number & The code point of the glyph to use.\\
+ & string & The name of the glyph to use.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gredefsizedsymbol}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}\{\#3\}}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+Defines (or redefines) a \TeX\ control sequence to be a non-score symbol
+which requires a single numeric argument (in points) to which the symbol
+will be scaled.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The name of the TeX control sequence (without leading backslash).\\
+ \#2 & string & The name of the font to use.\\
+ \#3 & number & The code point of the glyph to use.\\
+ & string & The name of the glyph to use.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresethepisemus}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Determines whether Gregorio\TeX\ should join (bridge) horizontal episema on adjacent notes.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & bridge & Adjacent horizontal episema are joined together (default).\\
+ & break & Adjacent horizontal episema are not joined.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetpunctumcavum}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+A shortcut for switching to the alternative punctum cavum and back.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & alternate & use the alternate punctum cavum\\
+ & normal & use the normal punctum cavum
+\end{argtable}
+
+Using the alternate punctum cavum is the equivalent of issuing the following commands:
+
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \grechangeglyph{PunctumCavum}{greciliae}{.caeciliae}%
+ \grechangeglyph{LineaPunctumCavum}{greciliae}{.caeciliae}%
+ \grechangeglyph{PunctumCavumHole}{greciliae}{.caeciliae}%
+ \grechangeglyph{LineaPunctumCavumHole}{greciliae}{.caeciliae}%
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetglyphstyle}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+Gregorio\TeX\ supports several glyph styles which can be changed with this macro. These style replace some non-note glyphs with alternatives.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & default & Use the default style\\
+ & medicaea & Use a Medicaea style\\
+ & hufnagel & Use the hufnagel style\\
+ & mensural & Use the mensural style
+\end{argtable}
+
+%%% Should there be a table here or in the appendix which shows the affected glyphs in each of the styles?
+
+
+\subsubsection[Barred letters (A/, etc.)]{Barred letters (\Abar, etc.)}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresimpledefbarredsymbol}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+Redefines a \TeX\ control sequence to be a a barred symbol.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & character & must be \texttt{A}, \texttt{R}, or \texttt{V}.\\
+ \#2 & dimension & how much the bar will be shifted left.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+Gregorio does not have precomposed barred letters, instead, it has bars that you
+can you to composed barred letters in your text font. This command is the most
+simple version.
+
+For example:
+
+\medskip \begin{latexcode}
+ \gresimpledefbarglyph{A}{0.3em}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+Will define \texttt{\textbackslash Abar} to be a A with a bar shifted right
+of \texttt{0.3em} from the beginning of the glyph. This is the default definition
+and fits well with the Linux Libertine font. If you use another font, you'll
+certainly have to change this value by calling the \texttt{gresimpledefbarglyph} command.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gredefbarredsymbol}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}\{\#3\}\{\#4\}\{\#5\}\{\#6\}}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+Redefines a \TeX\ control sequence to be a barred symbol.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the name of the command you want to define.\\
+ \#2 & string & command to typeset the text.\\
+ \#3 & string & symbol of the bar (must be defined through \texttt{gredefsizedsymbol}).\\
+ \#4 & number & the size of greextra to use (in pt).\\
+ \#5 & dimension & horizontal right shift of the bar.\\
+ \#6 & dimension & vertical shift of the bar glyph.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+This is a more complete version of the previous command, it allows you to define
+barred letters with a different style. For example you can choose another bar
+drawing, or take a bar more adapted to small font size.
+
+For example:
+
+\begin{footnotesize}
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \gredefbarredsymbol{RBarBold}{\textbf{R}}{greRBarSmall}{13}{1.7mm}{0.1mm}
+\end{latexcode}
+\end{footnotesize}
+
+\gredefbarredsymbol{RBarBold}{\textbf{R}}{greRBarSmall}{13}{1.7mm}{0.1mm}
+
+Will define \texttt{\textbackslash RBarBold} to be a bold \textbf{R} with
+the bar made for small text (a bit bolder, named \texttt{RBarSmall} in greextra)
+, at 12pt, shifted right of \texttt{1.7mm} from the beginning of the glyph, and lowered down
+by \texttt{0.1mm}. The result is that \texttt{\textbackslash RBarBold} will typeset \RBarBold .
+
+See Appendix \ref{subsec:greextra} for a list of bars and other
+symbols present in the greextra font.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grelatexsimpledefbarredsymbol}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}\{\#3\}\{\#4\}\{\#5\}}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+Redefines a \TeX\ control sequence to be a barred symbol.
+
+\bigskip\textbf{Only available in \LaTeX.}
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & character & must be \texttt{A}, \texttt{R}, or \texttt{V}.\\
+ \#2 & dimension & how much the bar will be shifted left when upright and medium weight.\\
+ \#3 & dimension & how much the bar will be shifted left when italic/slanted and medium weight.\\
+ \#4 & dimension & how much the bar will be shifted left when upright and bold.\\
+ \#5 & dimension & how much the bar will be shifted left when italic/slanted and bold.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+This is like \verb=gresimpledefbarglyph=, but allows setting different shifts
+for different font shapes and weights. If you need something more elaborate,
+you will need to redefine the bar macro(s) manually. This macro is only
+available in \LaTeX{} because it depends upon the \LaTeX{} font system.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grebarredsymbol}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}\{\#3\}\{\#4\}\{\#5\}}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+Generates a barred symbol. This macro does not change any barred symbol
+definitions. Instead, it actually generates the code that would show the
+barred symbol.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & command to typeset the text.\\
+ \#2 & string & symbol of the bar (must be defined through \texttt{gredefsizedsymbol}).\\
+ \#3 & number & the size of greextra to use (in pt).\\
+ \#4 & dimension & horizontal right shift of the bar.\\
+ \#5 & dimension & vertical shift of the bar glyph.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greseparator}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+A macro for invoking one of the five separators (fancy lines) which are contained in the greextra font.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 1--5 & the line desired\\
+ \#2 & integer & the point size at which to print the line\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\subsubsection{Styling}
+Different elements of an include score have different styles applied. These elements and their defaults are listed below:
+
+\let\stylename\texttt
+\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+\bigskip\rowcolors{1}{lightgray}{lightgray}
+\begin{tabular}{lp{7cm plus .5cm}r}
+ Element Name & Description & Default\\
+ \hline
+ \stylename{initial} & Normal Initials & 40 pt font\\
+ \stylename{biginitial} & Big (2-Line) Initials & 80 pt font\\
+ \stylename{translation} & Translation text (appears below lyrics) & {\it italics}\\
+ \stylename{abovelinestext} & Above line text (\texttt{<alt></alt>} in gabc, appears above the staff) & normal\\
+ \stylename{normalstafflines} & Full length staff lines & none\\
+ \stylename{additionalstafflines} & short lines behind notes above or below the staff & special\footnotemark[1]\\
+ \stylename{lowchoralsign} & low choral signs & none\\
+ \stylename{highchoralsign} & high choral signs & none\\
+ \stylename{firstsyllableinitial} & the first letter of the first syllable of a score which is not the score initial & none\\
+ \stylename{firstsyllable} & the balance of the first syllable of the score & none\\
+ \stylename{modeline} & the rendered annotation from the \texttt{mode: ;} header in the gabc file & \parbox[t]{2.2cm}{\raggedleft\textsc{\textbf{Bold Small Capitals}}}\\
+ \stylename{nabc} & ancient notation & {\color{gregoriocolor}gregoriocolor} (\LaTeX)\\
+ && none (Plain\TeX)\\
+\end{tabular}
+
+\footnotemark[1]\textit{Special:} By default, \texttt{additionalstafflines} inherits its properties from \texttt{normalstafflines}. To decouple these environments, you must manually change \texttt{additionalstafflines} using \texttt{\textbackslash grechangestyle}.
+\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\arabic{footnote}}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grechangestyle}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}[\#3]}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Command to change styling of a score element.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & element whose styling is to be changed (see list above for options)\\
+ \#2 & \TeX\ code & the code necessary to turn on the styling\\
+ \#3 & \TeX\ code & Optional. The code necessary to turn off the styling (\eg, if the code to turn on the styling contains a \verb=\begin{environment}= then the code to turn it off must have the matching \verb=\end{environment}=.
+\end{argtable}
+
+Examples:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ % This one works for both PlainTeX and LaTeX this would make
+ % the translations bold and italic
+ \grechangestyle{translation}{\it\bf}
+
+ % This one is LaTeX only, and would make the above lines
+ % text small and italic
+ \grechangestyle{abovelinetext}{\begin{small}\begin{italic}}%
+ [\end{italic}\end{small}]
+
+ % This would make the initial print in 36pt font.
+ \grechangestyle{initial}{\fontsize{36}{36}\selectfont}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\bigskip
+Each element will be typeset within an isolated group to prevent styling commands from leaking from one element to the next. As a result, if a styling command has an ``on-switch'' but no ``off-switch'' (like \verb=\it= or \verb=\bf= in the first example above) it is not necessary to encapsulate them within \verb=\begingroup= and \verb=\endgroup=. As a result, the third argument is only necessary for styling commands which come in pairs (like the environments in the second example).
+
+\subsubsection{Text Elements}
+While the gabc headers provide support for some of the text elements commonly found on chant scores, Gregorio\TeX\ provides the following functions to allow you to enter and control those elements with a greater degree of precision than the gabc headers.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greannotation}{[\#1]\{\#2\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to add annotations (the text which appears above the initial) to a score. While a single call of the function does not support multiple lines, successive calls to the function will be added to the annotation as a new line below what is already there.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & c & When adding a new line, align the center of the new line with the center of the existing lines\\
+ & l & When adding a new line, align the left side of the new line with the left side of the existing lines\\
+ & r & When adding a new line, align the right side of the new line with the right side of the existing lines\\
+ \#2 & string & the text of the annotation
+\end{argtable}
+
+\textbf{Nota Bene:} The first argument does not affect the alignment of lines already in the annotation, only the way the new line aligns with the existing lines as a whole.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grecommentary}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to add commentary (the text flush right at the top, usually a scripture reference) to a score. While a single call of this function does not support multiple lines, successive calls to the function will add a new line to the commentary directly below the previous.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The text of the commentary.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\textbf{Nota Bene:} This command should appear directly before \verb=\gregorioscore= when used.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grescorereference}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to hold the score reference. Currently the score reference does not print.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The text of the score reference.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greillumination}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to add an illuminated initial.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \TeX\ code & the code necessary to make the illuminated initial appear\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\textbf{Nota Bene:} Usually the argument of this command should be an \verb=\includegraphics= command, but you may use what ever you want as the illuminated initial.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Text Alignment}
+Gregorio\TeX\ allows you to manipulate the global alignment behavior of some text elements using the following commands.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetlyriccentering}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to set how the text of the lyrics aligns with the alignment point of its respective neumes. The alignment point of the neumes is determined as follows:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If the first glyph is only one note, or is a normal pes, or is composed of three or more notes, the alignment point is the middle of the first note.
+\item If the first glyph is composed of two notes (other than a normal pes), the alignment point is the middle of the glyph.
+\item In the case of a porrectus, the alignment point is the middle of an imaginary square punctum beginning at the same point as the porrectus.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & vowel & The center of the vowel in the syllable will align with the alignment point of the neumes\\
+ & syllable & The center of the syllable will align with the alignment point of the neumes
+\end{argtable}
+
+\textbf{Nota Bene:} What constitutes the ``vowel'' of the syllable is determined by the language the lyric text is written in, as specified by the use of the \texttt{language} header in the gabc file. Out of the box, Gregorio\TeX\ explicitly supports only Latin and English, but the rules for Latin have a high degree of overlap with many Romance languages, allowing them to fall back on the Latin rules with acceptable results.
+
+You can also define your own languages in \texttt{gregorio-vowels.dat}. If you do define a language, please consider sharing your work by submitting it to the project (see CONTRIBUTING.md for instructions).
+
+Finally, in cases where you want some sort of exceptional alignment, you can force Gregorio to consider a particular part of the syllable to be the ``vowel'' by enclosing it in curly braces (``\{'' and ``\}'') in your gabc file.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresettranslationcentering}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to specify how the translation text should be aligned with it respective syllable text.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & left & The translation text is left aligned with its respective syllable text.\\
+ & center & The translation text is centered under its respective syllable.
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsubsection{End of Line Behavior}
+While Gregorio\TeX\ will automatically wrap scores to fit your page, there are several ways to fine tune that line breaking behavior with the following commands.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetbreakineuouae}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to determine whether line breaks are allowed inside a EUOUAE area (delimited by \texttt{<eu></eu>} tags in gabc).
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & allow & Line breaks are allowed\\
+ & prohibit & Line breaks are prohibited, the entire EUOUAE area should appear on one line
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetbreakintranslation}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to determine whether line breaks are allowed inside a translation.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & allow & Line breaks are allowed\\
+ & prohibit & Line breaks are prohibited, the entire translation should appear on one line
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greseteolcustos}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to determine whether Gregorio\TeX\ should automatically place the custos at a line break.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & auto & Custos will be automatically placed at each line break\\
+ & manual & Custos will only be placed at line breaks if they are specified in the gabc (\eg \texttt{(g+z)})
+\end{argtable}
+
+\textbf{Nota Bene:} This command only effects the custos that appears at the end of a line. Custos which are placed at a key change are unaffected. Further, if custos are specified in the gabc file manually and Gregorio\TeX\ is set to place custos automatically, you will get two custos at the line breaks.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greseteolshifts}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to determine whether Gregorio\TeX\ should apply a small shift at the end of each line, thus allowing lyrics to stretch under the final custos.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & enable & The shifts are applied (default)\\
+ & disable & The shifts are not applied.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetbolshifts}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to determine whether Gregorio\TeX\ should apply a small shift at the beginning of each line so that lines are aligned on the notes rather than the syllable text.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & enable & The shifts are applied (default)\\
+ & disable & The shifts are not applied.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetlastline}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to determine whether the last line of the score should be justified or not.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & justified & Set the last line justified with the rest of the score\\
+ & ragged & Set the last line ragged (default)
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Hyphenation}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresethyphen}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Tell Gregorio\TeX\ to when to place a hyphen between
+syllables in polysyllabic words in a score. This is done by overriding \texttt{maximumspacewithoutdash} so subsequent changes to this dimension will override this command.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & force & Hyphens will appear between all syllables in polysyllabic words.\\
+ & auto & Hyphens will appear based on the setting of \texttt{maximumspacewithoutdash}
+\end{argtable}
+
+\textbf{Nota Bene:} \verb=\gresethyphen{auto}= restores \texttt{maximumspacewithoutdash} to the value found in \textit{gsp-default.tex}. If you have changed your score size, you may need to change this distance to a more appropriate value using \verb=\grechangedim=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greseteolhyphen}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Marco to determine how much space the hyphen at the end of a line occupies for the purposes of spacing caluclations.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & normal & The hyphen occupies its normal space\\
+ & zero & The hyphen is considered to take up no space
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Clef Visibility}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetclef}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to tell Gregorio\TeX\ whether the clefs should be printed or not.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & visible & Clefs will be printed (default)\\
+ & invisible & Clefs will not be printed
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsubsection{Clivis Alignment}
+Since the center of the clivis is different from most neumes, Gregorio\TeX\ supports several behaviors for determining how to align it with its lyrics.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetclivisalignment}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to determine the method used for aligning the clivis with its lyrics.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & always & Align on the real center of the clivis\\
+ & never & align on the center of the first punctum in the clivis\\
+ & special & align on the real center of the clivis except when (1) notes would go left of text or (2) - consonants after vowels are larger than \verb=\gre@dimen@clivisalignmentmin= (default)
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+
+\subsubsection{Braces}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetbracerendering}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to tell Gregorio\TeX{} whether to use \MP{} or fonts to render
+braces. \MP{} braces, the default, are tailored to better maintain
+optical line weight when stretched. \MP{} braces are designed to
+harmonize (and thus match best) with greciliae, but they still look good
+with the other score fonts.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & metapost & \MP{} will be used to render braces (default)\\
+ & font & The score font will be used to render braces
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grebarbracewidth}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Returns the em-relative width of a bar brace when braces are rendered by
+\MP{} (as opposed to fonts). The value is scaled by the gregorio score
+size factor and thus is a score-relative value with a precise (but
+obscure) mathematical meaning. Suffice it to say that larger numbers
+make the bar brace wider and smaller numbers make the brace narrower.
+This must be a positive number, defaults to \texttt{.58879}, and
+harmonizes with the greciliae font. This macro must be redefined should
+a different value be desired.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Ancient Notation}
+For a full description of how to make use of the ancient notation capabilities of gregorio and Gregorio\TeX, look at the GregorioNabcRef documentation. The commands listed here allow the manipulation of settings related to that notation.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gresetnabcfont}{\{\#1\}\{\#2\}}{gregoriotex-nabc.tex}
+Macro to set the font to be used for the ancient notation.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the name of the font\\
+ \#2 & integer & point size at which the font should be loaded\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsection{Distances}\label{distances}
+
+Each of the following distances controls some aspect of the spacing of the Gregorio\TeX\ score. They are changed using \verb=\grechangedim=, documented above. If the distance permits a rubber value, then the default value will indicate the stretch and shrink (even if they are zero by default). Distances whose default value does not include a stretch or shrink may not take a rubber value.
+
+\emph{Note:} Because of the way Gregorio\TeX\ handles distances, these cannot be manipulated as if they were normal \TeX\ dimensions or skips. As a result they should only be changed using the command defined by Gregorio\TeX\ for this purpose.
+
+\macroname{additionallineswidth}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The additional width of the additional lines (compared to the width of the glyph they're associated with).
+
+Default: \unit[0.14584]{cm}
+
+\macroname{alterationspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between an alteration (flat or natural) and the next glyph.
+
+Default: \unit[0.07747]{cm} plus \unit[0.01276]{cm} minus \unit[0.00455]{cm}
+
+\macroname{beforealterationspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Negative space, difference between the normal space between two notes and the space between a note and a flat.
+
+Default: $\unit[-0.32816]{cm}$ plus \unit[0.01093]{cm} minus \unit[0.01093]{cm}
+
+\macroname{beforelowchoralsignspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space before a low choral sign.
+
+Default: \unit[0.04556]{cm} plus \unit[0.00638]{cm} minus \unit[0.00638]{cm}
+
+\macroname{clefflatspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between a clef and a flat (for clefs with flat).
+
+Default: \unit[0.05469]{cm} plus \unit[0.00638]{cm} minus \unit[0.00638]{cm}
+
+\macroname{interglyphspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between glyphs in the same element.
+
+Default: \unit[0.06927]{cm} plus \unit[0.00363]{cm} minus \unit[0.00363]{cm}
+
+\macroname{zerowidthspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Null space.
+
+Default: \unit[0]{cm} plus \unit[0]{cm} minus \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{interelementspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between elements.
+
+Default: \unit[0.06927]{cm} plus \unit[0.00182]{cm} minus \unit[0.00363]{cm}
+
+\macroname{largerspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Larger space between elements.
+
+Default: \unit[0.10938]{cm} plus \unit[0.01822]{cm} minus \unit[0.00911]{cm}
+
+\macroname{glyphspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between elements which has the size of a note.
+
+Default: \unit[0.21877]{cm} plus \unit[0.01822]{cm} minus \unit[0.01822]{cm}
+
+\macroname{intersyllablespacenotes}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Minimum space between two notes of different syllables.
+
+Default: \unit[0.25523]{cm} plus \unit[0.31903]{cm} minus \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacebeforecustos}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space before custos.
+
+Default: \unit[0.1823]{cm} plus \unit[0.31903]{cm} minus \unit[0.0638]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacebeforesigns}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space before punctum mora and augmentum duplex.
+
+Default: \unit[0.05469]{cm} plus \unit[0.00455]{cm} minus \unit[0.00455]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spaceaftersigns}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space after punctum mora and augmentum duplex.
+
+Default: \unit[0.08203]{cm} plus \unit[0.0082]{cm} minus \unit[0.0082]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spaceafterlineclef}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space after a clef at the beginning of a line.
+
+Default: \unit[0.27345]{cm} plus \unit[0.14584]{cm} minus \unit[0.01367]{cm}
+
+\macroname{interwordspacenotes}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space after at the end of a word when the last written symbol is a note and the first is a note.
+
+Default: \unit[0.29169]{cm} plus \unit[0.08751]{cm} minus \unit[0.05469]{cm}
+
+\macroname{interwordspacetext}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space after at the end of a word when the last written symbol is text and the first is text.
+
+Default: \unit[0.22787]{cm} plus \unit[0.41019]{cm} minus \unit[0.07292]{cm}
+
+\macroname{interwordspacenotes@euouae}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space after at the end of a word when the last written symbol is a note and the first is a note in \texttt{euouae} blocks.
+
+Default: \unit[0.19]{cm} plus \unit[0.1]{cm} minus \unit[0.05]{cm}
+
+\macroname{interwordspacetext@euouae}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space after at the end of a word when the last written symbol is text and the first is text in \texttt{euouae} blocks.
+
+Default: \unit[0.27]{cm} plus \unit[0.1]{cm} minus \unit[0.05]{cm}
+
+\macroname{bitrivirspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between notes of a bivirga or trivirga.
+
+Default: \unit[0.06927]{cm} plus \unit[0.00182]{cm} minus \unit[0.00546]{cm}
+
+\macroname{bitristrospace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between notes of a bistropha or tristrophae.
+
+Default: \unit[0.06927]{cm} plus \unit[0.00182]{cm} minus \unit[0.00546]{cm}
+
+\macroname{punctuminclinatumshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between two punctum inclinatum.
+
+Default: \unit[-0.03918]{cm} plus \unit[0.0009]{cm} minus \unit[0.0009]{cm}
+
+\macroname{beforepunctainclinatashift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space before puncta inclinata.
+
+Default: \unit[0.05286]{cm} plus \unit[0.00728]{cm} minus \unit[0.00455]{cm}
+
+\macroname{punctuminclinatumanddebilisshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between a punctum inclinatum and a punctum inclinatum deminutus.
+
+Default: \unit[-0.02278]{cm} plus \unit[0.0009]{cm} minus \unit[0.0009]{cm}
+
+\macroname{punctuminclinatumdebilisshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between two punctum inclinatum deminutus.
+
+Default: \unit[-0.00728]{cm} plus \unit[0.0009]{cm} minus \unit[0.0009]{cm}
+
+\macroname{punctuminclinatumbigshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between puncta inclinata, larger ambitus (range=3rd).
+
+Default: \unit[0.07565]{cm} plus \unit[0.0009]{cm} minus \unit[0.0009]{cm}
+
+\macroname{punctuminclinatummaxshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between puncta inclinata, larger ambitus (range=4th -or more?-).
+
+Default: \unit[0.17865]{cm} plus \unit[0.0009]{cm} minus \unit[0.0009]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacearoundsmallbar}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space around virgula and divisio minima.
+
+Default: \unit[0.1823]{cm} plus \unit[0.22787]{cm} minus \unit[0.05469]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacearoundminor}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space around divisio minor.
+
+Default: \unit[0.1823]{cm} plus \unit[0.22787]{cm} minus \unit[0.05469]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacearoundmaior}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space around divisio maior.
+
+Default: \unit[0.1823]{cm} plus \unit[0.22787]{cm} minus \unit[0.05469]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacearoundfinalis}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space around divisio finalis.
+
+Default: \unit[0.1823]{cm} plus \unit[0.1823]{cm} minus \unit[0.05469]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacebeforefinalfinalis}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+A special space for finalis, for when it is the last glyph.
+
+Default: \unit[0.29169]{cm} plus \unit[0.07292]{cm} minus \unit[0.27345]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacearoundclefbars}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Additional space that will appear around bars that are preceded by a custos and followed by a key.
+
+Default: \unit[0.03645]{cm} plus \unit[0.00455]{cm} minus \unit[0.0009]{cm}
+
+\macroname{textbartextspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between the text and the text of the bar.
+
+Default: \unit[0.24611]{cm} plus \unit[0.13672]{cm} minus \unit[0.04921]{cm}
+
+\macroname{notebarspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Minimal space between a note and a bar.
+
+Default: \unit[0.31903]{cm} plus \unit[0.27345]{cm} minus \unit[0.02824]{cm}
+
+\macroname{maximumspacewithoutdash}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Maximal space between two syllables for which we consider a dash is not needed.
+
+Default: \unit[0.02005]{cm}
+
+\macroname{afterclefnospace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+An extensible space for the beginning of lines.
+
+Default: \unit[0]{cm} plus \unit[0.27345]{cm} minus \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{additionalcustoslineswidth}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Width of the additional lines, used only for the custos. The width is the one for the custos at end of lines, the line for custos in the middle of a score is the same multiplied by 2.
+
+Default: \unit[0.09114]{cm}
+
+\macroname{afterinitialshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between the initial and the beginning of the score.
+
+Default: \unit[0.2457]{cm} plus \unit[0]{cm} minus \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{beforeinitialshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between the initial and the beginning of the score.
+
+Default: \unit[0.2457]{cm} plus \unit[0]{cm} minus \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{minimalspaceatlinebeginning}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Minimal space at the beginning of a line.
+
+Default: \unit[1.7]{cm}
+
+\macroname{manualinitialwidth}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space to force the initial width to. Ignored when 0.
+
+Default: \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{annotationseparation}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+This space is the one between lines in the annotation (text above the initial).
+
+Default: \unit[0.85]{cm}
+
+\macroname{annotationraise}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Amount to raise (positive) or lower (negative) the annotation from it's normal position (baseline of the first line aligned with the top line of the staff).
+
+Default: \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{noclefspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space at the beginning of the lines if there is no clef.
+
+Default: \unit[0.1]{cm}
+
+\macroname{abovesignsspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space above the chironomic signs.
+
+Default: \unit[0.8]{cm}
+
+\macroname{belowsignsspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space below the chironomic signs.
+
+Default: \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{choralsigndownshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The distance to shift choral signs down. The following choral signs are shifted down:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item Low choral signs that are not lower than the note
+ \item High choral signs which are in a space
+ \item Low choral signs that are lower than the note which are in a space
+\end{itemize}
+
+Default: \unit[0.00911]{cm}
+
+\macroname{choralsignupshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The distance to shift choral signs up. The following choral signs are shifted up:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item High choral signs which are on a line
+ \item Low choral signs that are lower than the note which are on a line
+\end{itemize}
+
+Default: \unit[0.04556]{cm}
+
+\macroname{translationheight}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The space for the translation.
+
+Default: \unit[0.5]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spaceabovelines}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The space above the lines.
+
+Default: \unit[0.45576]{cm} plus \unit[0.36461]{cm} minus \unit[0.09114]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacelinestext}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The space between the lines and the bottom of the text.
+
+Default: \unit[0.60617]{cm} plus \unit[0]{cm} minus \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{spacebeneathtext}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The space beneath the text.
+
+Default: \unit[0]{cm} plus \unit[0]{cm} minus \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{abovelinestextraise}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Height of the text above the note line.
+
+Default: \unit[1.7]{cm}
+
+\macroname{abovelinestextheight}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Height that is added at the top of the lines if there is text above the lines (it must be bigger than the text for it to be taken into consideration).
+
+Default: \unit[0.3]{cm}
+
+\macroname{braceshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+An additional shift you can give to the brace above the bars.
+
+Default: \unit[0]{cm}
+
+\macroname{curlybraceaccentusshift}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+A shift you can give to the accentus above the curly brace.
+
+Default: $\unit[-0.05]{cm}$
+
+\macroname{nabcinterelementspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space between elements in ancient notation.
+
+Default: \unit[0.06927]{cm} plus \unit[0.00182]{cm} minus \unit[0.00363]{cm}
+
+\macroname{nabclargerspace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Larger space between elements in ancient notation.
+
+Default: \unit[0.10938]{cm} plus \unit[0.01822]{cm} minus \unit[0.00911]{cm}
+
+\macroname{clivisalignmentmin}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+When \verb=\gre@clivisalignment= is 2, this distance is the maximum length of the consonants after vowels for which the clivis will be aligned on its center.
+
+Default: \unit[0.3]{cm}
+
+\macroname{clefchangespace}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Space around a clef change.
+
+Default: \unit[0.01768]{cm} plus \unit[0.00175]{cm} minus \unit[0.01768]{cm}
+
+
+\subsection{Penalties}\label{penalties}
+Penalties are used by \TeX\ to determine where line and page breaks should occur. Gregorio\TeX\ modifies or defines a few of its own to help with that process in scores.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grebrokenpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The vertical penalty inserted after a break on a clef change.
+
+Default: 0
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greclubpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The club penalty (determines how important it is to prevent orphans from occurring).
+
+Default: 0
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grewidowpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The widow penalty (determines how important it is to prevent widows from occurring).
+
+Default: 0
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greemergencystretch}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The value of the last ditch stretch for overfull boxes.
+
+Default: \verb=\emergencystretch=
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greendafterbarpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The end after bar penalty.
+
+Default: $-200$
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greendafterbaraltpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The alternate end after bar penalty (used when there is no text under the bar).
+
+Default: $-200$
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greendofelementpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The end of element penalty.
+
+Default: $-50$
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greendofsyllablepenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The end of element penalty.
+
+Default: $-50$
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greendofwordpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The end of element penalty.
+
+Default: $-100$
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grehyphenpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The hyphen penalty.
+
+Default: $-200$
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grenobreakpenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Penalty to prevent a line break.
+
+Default: 10001
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grenewlinepenalty}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+Penalty to force a line break.
+
+Default: -10001
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grelooseness}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The \TeX\ looseness within a score.
+
+Default: \verb=\looseness=
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gretolerance}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The \TeX\ tolerance within a score. See \url{https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/TeX/tolerance} for an explanation of what tolerance is.
+
+Default: 9000
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grepretolerance}{}{gsp-default.tex}
+The \TeX\ pretolerance within a score. See \url{https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/TeX/pretolerance} for an explanation of what pretolerance is.
+
+Default: $-1$ (Lua\TeX\ versions prior to 0.80) or \verb=\pretolerance= (versions after, and including, 0.80)
+
+\textit{Nota bene:} For more details on why this is necessary see the comments in gsp-default.tex.
+
+
+
+
+
+\subsection{Colors}\label{colors}
+Colors are strictly a \LaTeX\ phenomena as currently implemented. All
+commands which change a color will raise a warning in Plain\TeX, but will not alter the document.
+
+All colors can be redefined using \verb=\definecolor=. See the
+\verb=xcolor= package for documentation.
+
+Example:\par\medskip
+\begin{latexcode}
+ \definecolor{gregoriocolor}{RGB}{229,53,44}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+\macroname{grebackgroundcolor}{}{gregoriotex.sty}
+The color Gregorio\TeX\ uses to block out elements which have been printed,
+but shouldn't show (\eg, the staff line going through the interior of
+a punctum cavum) \verb={RGB}{255,255,255}= (white)
+
+\macroname{gregoriocolor}{}{gregoriotex.sty}
+A red similar to that found in liturgical documents. This is the color that Gregorio\TeX\ uses for text formated with \texttt{<c></c>} tags in gabc.
+
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: latex
+%%% TeX-master: "GregorioRef"
+%%% End:
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_gregorio.tex b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_gregorio.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..801d2967ccd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_gregorio.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,854 @@
+% !TEX root = GregorioRef.tex
+% !TEX program = LuaLaTeX+se
+\section{Gregorio Controls}
+
+These functions are the ones written by Gregorio to the gtex file.
+While one could, in theory, use/change them to alter the appearance of
+elements of the score, it is far better to make your changes in the
+gabc file and let Gregorio make the changes to the gtex file.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreAnnotationLines}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A wrapper macro for placing annotations above the initial. The
+arguments are provided by the \texttt{gabc} file in the
+\texttt{annotation} header field. This macro tests for the presence
+of the annotation box which means that the annotation is explicitly
+defined in the \texttt{main.tex} file. If so, this macro does nothing,
+respecting the annotation value in the \texttt{main.tex} file.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & First line text to place above the initial.\\
+ \#2 & string & Second line text to place above the initial.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreBeginScore}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to start a score.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & a unique identifier for the score (currently an SHA-1-based digest of the gabc file)\\
+ \#2 & integer & the height number of the top pitch of the entire score, including signs\\
+ \#3 & integer & the height number of the bottom pitch of the entire score, including signs\\
+ \#4 & 0 & there is no translation line in the score\\
+ & 1 & there is a translation line somewhere in the score\\
+ \#5 & 0 & there is no above lines text in the score\\
+ & 1 & there is above lines text somewhere in the score\\
+ \#6 & string & the absolute filename of the gabc file if point-and-click is enabled.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreEndScore}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to end a score.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreAccentus}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting an accentus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & height number of episemus\\
+ \#2 & string & Type of glyph the episemus is attached to. See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial} argument for description of options.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreAdditionalLine}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset the additional line above or below the staff.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial}.\\
+ \#2 & integer & The ambitus of the porrectus or porrectus flexus if the first references these glyph types; ignored otherwise.\\
+ \#3 & integer & Set horizontal episemus (0), horizontal episemus under a note (1), line at top of staff (2), line at bottom of staff (3), choral sign (4).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreAdjustSecondLine}{}{gregoriotex.tex}
+%didn't actually find this one in gregoriotex-write.c, classified it here based on it’s related function GreAdjustThirdLine
+Macro to call before first syllable, but after \verb=\GreSetInitialClef=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreAdjustThirdLine}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to call during the second line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreAugmentumDuplex}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting an augmentum duplex (a pair of punctum mora)
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number for first punctum mora.\\
+ \#2 & integer & Height number for second punctum mora.\\
+ \#3 & integer & First punctum mora occurs before last note of a podatus, prorectus, or toculus resupinus (1), or not (0).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreBarBrace}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting a bar brace.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Type of glyph the episemus is attached to. See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial} argument for description of options.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreBarSyllable}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6\#7\#8\#9}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro for typesetting a bar syllable.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & First part of syllable text associated with the bar.\\
+ \#2 & string & Middle part of the syllable text associated with the bar.\\
+ \#3 & string & End part of the syllable text associated with the bar.\\
+ \#4 & & Not used.\\
+ \#5 & \TeX\ code & Code to execute before calculating \texttt{nextbegindifference}.\\
+ \#6 & & Not used.\\
+ \#7 & $0 <$ integer $< 19$ & the type of notes alignment. See \nameref{notesalign}.\\
+ & $20 <$ integer $< 39$ & Same as below 20 except there is a flat before the notes. Subtract 20 to get the type of notes alignment.\\
+ & $40 <$ integer $< 59$ & Same as below 20 except there is a natural before the notes. Subtract 40 to get the type of notes alignment.\\
+ \#8 & \TeX\ code & Code to execute before printing anything.\\
+ \#9 & \TeX\ code & The bar line (usually a \textit{writebar} call).
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreBarVEpisemus}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a vertical episemus around a bar.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Type of glyph the episemus is attached to. See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial} argument for description of options.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreBeginEUOUAE}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to mark the beginning of a EUOUAE block. Alters spacings and prohibits a line break until the end of the block.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreBeginNLBArea}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro called at beginning of a no line break area.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & Not in the neumes.\\
+ & 1 & In the neumes.\\
+ \#2 & 0 & Call didn't come from translation centering.\\
+ & 1 & Call came from translation centering.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreBeginNotes}{}{gregoriotex.tex}
+Macro to draw the staff lines. Comes after the initial but before the clef.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreBold}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty and gregoriotex.tex}
+Makes argument bold. Accesses \LaTeX\ \verb=\textbf= (\textit{gregoriotex.sty}) or Plain\TeX\ \verb=\bf= (\textit{gregoriotex.tex}) as appropriate. Corresponds to ``<b></b>'' tags in gabc.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to be typeset in bold.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreChangeClef}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro called when key changes
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & character & Type of new clef (c or f).\\
+ \#2 & integer & Line of new clef.\\
+ \#3 & 0 & Print space before clef.\\
+ & 1 & Do not print space before clef.\\
+ \#4 & integer & Height number of flat in key (`0' for no flat).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreCirculus}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting a circulus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of circulus.\\
+ \#2 & string & Type of glyph the circulus is attached to. See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial} argument for description of options.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreColored}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty and gregoriotex.tex}
+Colors argument (a string) in \verb=gregoriocolor.= Corresponds to ``<c></c>'' tags in gabc. Does nothing in Plain\TeX\ because color is not supported there.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreCPVirgaReversaAscendensOnDLine}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Allows the Dominican rule set to force long stems to be used for virga
+reversa ascendens neumes on the ``d'' (lowest) line. This macro is
+defined and re-defined by the \verb=\gresetgregoriofont= macro.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \TeX{} code & The \TeX{} code to use when long stems are not forced.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreCP...}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A class of macros which point to the individual characters in a Gregoiro\TeX\ compatible font. This class of macros is dynamically mapped from the glyph names embedded in the \texttt{ttf} file via a Lua script to ensure that the code points match up with the installed font.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreCustos}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Typesets a custos.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of custos.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreDagger}{}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+Macro to typeset a dagger (\GreDagger).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreDiscretionary}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+A GregorioTeX specific discretionary used to avoid clef change at beginning or end of line, or even with more complex data (z0::c3 for instance). We require a special function because in the normal discretionary function you cannot use \verb=\hskip= (but you can use \verb=\kern=) and you cannot use \verb=\penalty= (which is useless indeed). This macro corrects for these two limitations.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreDivisioFinalis}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a divisio finalis.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & code & Macros which may happen before the skip but after the divisio finalis (typically \verb=\grevepisemus=).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreDivisioMaior}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a divisio maior.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & code & Macros which may happen before the skip but after the divisio maior (typically \verb=\grevepisemus=).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreDivisioMinima}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a divisio minima.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & code & Macros which may happen before the skip but after the divisio minima (typically \verb=\grevepisemus=).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreDivisioMinor}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a divisio minor.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & code & Macros which may happen before the skip but after the divisio minor (typically \verb=\grevepisemus=).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreDominica}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a dominican bar.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer 1-- 6& Type of dominican bar. Corresponds to bar types 6--11 in \verb=\grewritebar=.\\
+ \#2 & code & Macros which may happen before the skip but after the divisio dominica (typically \verb=\grevepisemus=).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreEndEUOUAE}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to mark the end of a EUOUAE block.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & ending element\\
+ & 1 & ending syllable\\
+ & 2 & ending score\\
+ & 3 & before bar
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreEndOfElement}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to end elements.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & Default space.\\
+ & 1 & Larger space.\\
+ & 2 & Glyph space.\\
+ & 3 & Zero-width space.\\
+ \#2 & 0 & Space is breakable.\\
+ & 1 & Space is unbreakable.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreEndNLBArea}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to end a no line break area.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & ending element\\
+ & 1 & ending syllable\\
+ & 2 & ending score\\
+ & 3 & before bar\\
+ \#2 & 0 & ??\\ %I can’t tell what this flag is for
+ & else & ??
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreEndOfGlyph}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to end a glyph without ending the element.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & Default space.\\
+ & 1 & Zero-width space.\\
+ & 2 & Space between flat or natural and a note.\\
+ & 3 & Space between two puncta inclinata.\\
+ & 4 & Space between bivirga or trivirga.\\
+ & 5 & space between bistropha or tristropha.\\
+ & 6 & Space after a punctum mora XXX: not used yet, not so sure it is a good idea\ldots\\
+ & 7 & Space between a punctum inclinatum and a punctum inclinatum debilis.\\
+ & 8 & Space between two puncta inclinata debilis.\\
+ & 9 & Space before a punctum (or something else) and a punctum inclinatum.\\
+ & 10 & Space between puncta inclinata (also debilis for now), larger ambitus (range=3rd).\\
+ & 11 & Space between puncta inclinata (also debilis for now), larger ambitus (range=4th or more).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreFinalDivisioFinalis}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to end a score with a divisio finalis.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & Something does not need to be placed after the divisio finalis.\\
+ & 1 & Something needs to be placed after the divisio finalis.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreFinalDivisioMaior}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to end a score with a divisio maior.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & Something does not need to be placed after the divisio maior.\\
+ & 1 & Something needs to be placed after the divisio maior.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreFirstSyllable}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-syllble.tex}
+A macro which is called with the text of the first syllable, excluding the
+initial of the score. This macro may be redefined to style the first syllable
+appropriately. This macro may be called up to three times: for the letters
+before the centered letters, for the centered letters, and for the letters
+after the centered letters.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text from the first syllable.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreFirstSyllableInitial}{\{\#1\}}{gregoriotex-syllble.tex}
+A macro which is called with the first letter of the first syllable which is
+not the initial of the score. If the \texttt{initial-style} is \texttt{0}, the
+first letter of the syllable will be passed. If the \texttt{initial-style} is
+\texttt{1} or \texttt{2}, the \emph{second} letter will be passed. This macro
+may be redefined to style the first letter appropriately.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The first letter of the first syllable which is not the
+ initial of the score.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreFlat}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a flat.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of the flat.\\
+ \#2 & 0 & No flat for a key change.\\
+ & 1 & Indicates the flat for a key change.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreFuseTwo}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for fusing two glyphs to create a larger neume.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyph & The first glyph in the sequence.\\
+ \#2 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyph & The second.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreGlyph}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6\#7}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to typeset a glyph.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & character & the character that it must call\\
+ \#2 & integer & The number for where the glyph is located. \texttt{a} in gabc is 1, \texttt{b} is 2, \etc\\
+ \#3 & integer & height number of the next note\\
+ \#4 & 0 & One-note glyph or more than two notes glyph except porrectus: \ie, we must put the aligncenter in the middle of the first note\\
+ & 1 & Two notes glyph (podatus is considered as a one-note glyph): \ie, we put the aligncenter in the middle of the glyph\\
+ & 2 & Porrectus: has a special align center.\\
+ & 3 & initio-debilis : same as 1 but the first note is much smaller\\
+ & 4 & case of a glyph starting with a quilisma\\
+ & 5 & case of a glyph starting with an oriscus\\
+ & 6 & case of a punctum inclinatum\\
+ & 7 & case of a stropha\\
+ & 8 & flexus with an ambitus of one\\
+ & 9 & flexus deminutus\\
+ \#5 & \TeX\ code & signs to typeset before the glyph (typically additional bars, as they must be "behind" the glyph)\\
+ \#6 & \TeX\ code & signs to typeset after the glyph (almost all signs)\\
+ \#7 & string & the line, byte offset, and column address for textedit links when point-and-click is enabled
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreGlyphHeights}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Passes the glyph height limits. Currently does nothing, but will eventually be part of dynamic vertical spacing.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & the high height\\
+ \#2 & integer & the low height
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GregorioTeXAPIVersion}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Checks to see if Gregorio\TeX\ API is version specified by argument (and
+therefore compatible with the score.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Version number for Gregorio\TeX.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreHEpisemus}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a episemus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of the episemus.\\
+ \#2 & string & See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial}.\\
+ \#3 & integer & The ambitus for a two note episemus at the diagonal stroke of a
+ porrectus, porrectus flexus, orculus resupinus, or torculus resupinus
+ flexus.\\
+ \#4 & 0 & an horizontal episemus\\
+ & 1 & an horizontal episemus under a note\\
+ & 2 & a line at the top\\
+ & 3 & a line at the bottom\\
+ \#5 & f & a normal episemus\\
+ & l & a small episemus aligned left\\
+ & c & a small episemus aligned center\\
+ & r & a small episemus aligned right\\
+ \#6 & integer & Replacement for \#1 if a bridge causes a height substitution.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreHEpisemusBridge}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a bridge episemus father the last note of a glyph
+(element, syllable) if the next episemus is at the same height.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of the episemus.\\
+ \#2 & 0 & Episemus above the note.\\
+ & 1 & Episemus below the note.\\
+ \#3 & 0 & Default space.\\
+ & 1 & Zero-width space.\\
+ & 2 & Space between flat or natural and a note.\\
+ & 3 & Space between two puncta inclinata.\\
+ & 4 & Space between bivirga or trivirga.\\
+ & 5 & space between bistropha or tristropha.\\
+ & 6 & Space after a punctum mora XXX: not used yet, not so sure it is a good idea\ldots\\
+ & 7 & Space between a punctum inclinatum and a punctum inclinatum debilis.\\
+ & 8 & Space between two puncta inclinata debilis.\\
+ & 9 & Space before a punctum (or something else) and a punctum inclinatum.\\
+ & 10 & Space between puncta inclinata (also debilis for now), larger ambitus (range=3rd).\\
+ & 11 & Space between puncta inclinata (also debilis for now), larger ambitus (range=4th or more).
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreHighChoralSign}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting high choral signs.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of the sign.\\
+ \#2 & string & The choral sign.\\
+ \#3 & 0 & Choral sign does not occur before last note of podatus, porrectus, or torculus resupinus.\\
+ & 1 & Choral sign occurs before last note of podatus, porrectus, or torculus resupinus.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreHyph}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro used for end of line hyphens. Defaults to \verb=\grenormalhyph=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreInDivisioFinalis}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Same as \verb=\GreDivisioFinalis= except inside a syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreInDivisioMaior}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Same as \verb=\GreDivisioMaior= except inside a syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreInDivisioMinima}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Same as \verb=\GreDivisioMinima= except inside a syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreInDivisioMinor}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Same as \verb=\GreDivisioMinor= except inside a syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreInDominica}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Same as \verb=\GreDominica= except inside a syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreInVirgula}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Same as \verb=\GreVirgula= except inside a syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreItalic}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty or gregoriotex.tex}
+Makes argument (a string) italic. Accesses \LaTeX\ \verb=\textit= or
+Plain\TeX\ \verb=\it= as appropriate. Corresponds to ``<i></i>'' tags
+in gabc.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to be typeset in italic font.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreLastOfLine}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to set \verb=\gre@lastoflinecount= to 1 (\ie, mark that this syllable is the last of the line).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreLastOfScore}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to mark the syllable as the last of the score.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreLinea}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting a linea.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & Argument \#2 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height to raise the glyph.\\
+ \#2 & length & Argument \#3 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height of the next note.\\
+ \#3 & integer & Argument \#4 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The type of glyph.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreLineaPunctumCavum}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a linea punctum cavum.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & Argument \#2 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height to raise the glyph.\\
+ \#2 & length & Argument \#3 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height of the next note.\\
+ \#3 & integer & Argument \#4 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The type of glyph.\\
+ \#4 & \TeX\ code & Macros executed before the punctum cavum is written.\\
+ \#5 & character & Argument \#5 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The signs to typeset before the glyph.\\
+ \#6 & string & the line, byte offset, and column address for textedit links when point-and-click is enabled.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreLowChoralSign}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting low choral signs.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of the sign.\\
+ \#2 & string & The choral sign.\\
+ \#3 & 0 & Choral sign does not occur before last note of podatus, porrectus, or torculus resupinus.\\
+ & 1 & Choral sign occurs before last note of podatus, porrectus, or torculus resupinus.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreManualCustos}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a custos manually.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & height number of the custos.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreMode}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+If the gabc file contains a mode in the header, then this function
+places said mode as the first (top) annotation. If the user has
+manually added a first annotation in the \TeX\ file, then this
+function does nothing. Also, if the \texttt{annotation} header field
+is used, then this function does nothing.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 1--8 & The mode. Other values are ignored.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreNatural}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a natural.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of the natural.\\
+ \#2 & 0 & No flat for a key change.\\
+ & 1 & Indicates the flat for a key change.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreNewLine}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to call if you want to go to the next line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreNewParLine}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Same as \verb=\GreNewLine= except line is not justified.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreNextCustos}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Sets the pitch to use for the next custos if it were to happen at the point
+where this macro is called.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of the custos.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreNoInitial}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro called when no initial is being set.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreOverBrace}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a round brace above the lines.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & The width of the brace.\\
+ \#2 & length & A vertical shift.\\
+ \#3 & length & A horizontal shift.\\
+ \#4 & 0 & Don't shift before starting the brace.\\
+ & 1 & Shift back a punctum's width before starting the brace.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreOverCurlyBrace}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a curly brace above the lines.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & The width of the brace.\\
+ \#2 & length & A vertical shift.\\
+ \#3 & length & A horizontal shift.\\
+ \#4 & 0 & Don't shift before starting the brace.\\
+ & 1 & Shift back a punctum's width before starting the brace.\\
+ \#5 & 0 & No accentus above the brace.\\
+ & 1 & Typeset an accentus above the brace.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GrePunctumCavum}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a punctum cavum.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & Argument \#2 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height to raise the glyph.\\
+ \#2 & length & Argument \#3 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height of the next note.\\
+ \#3 & integer & Argument \#4 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The type of glyph.\\
+ \#4 & \TeX\ code & Macros executed before the punctum cavum is written.\\
+ \#5 & character & Argument \#5 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The signs to typeset before the glyph.\\
+ \#6 & string & the line, byte offset, and column address for textedit links when point-and-click is enabled.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GrePunctumCavumInclinatum}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a punctum cavum inclinatus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & Argument \#2 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height to raise the glyph.\\
+ \#2 & length & Argument \#3 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height of the next note.\\
+ \#3 & integer & Argument \#4 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The type of glyph.\\
+ \#4 & \TeX\ code & Macros executed before the punctum cavum is written.\\
+ \#5 & character & Argument \#5 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The signs to typeset before the glyph.\\
+ \#6 & string & the line, byte offset, and column address for textedit links when point-and-click is enabled.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GrePunctumCavumInclinatumAuctus}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a punctum cavum inclinatus auctus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & Argument \#2 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height to raise the glyph.\\
+ \#2 & length & Argument \#3 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height of the next note.\\
+ \#3 & integer & Argument \#4 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The type of glyph.\\
+ \#4 & \TeX\ code & Macros executed before the punctum cavum is written.\\
+ \#5 & character & Argument \#5 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The signs to typeset before the glyph.\\
+ \#6 & string & the line, byte offset, and column address for textedit links when point-and-click is enabled.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GrePunctumMora}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting punctum mora.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of punctum mora.\\
+ \#2 & 1 & Go back to end of punctum.\\
+ & 2 & Shift left width of 1 punctum.\\
+ & 3 & Shift left width of 1 punctum and ambitus of 1.\\
+ \#3 & 0 & Punctum mora does not occur before last note of podatus, porrectus, or torculus resupinus.\\
+ & 1 & Punctum mora occurs before last note of podatus, porrectus, or torculus resupinus.\\
+ \#4 & 0 & No punctum inclinatum.\\
+ & 1 & Punctum inclinatum.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreReversedAccentus}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting a reversed accentus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of accentus.\\
+ \#2 & string & Type of glyph the accentus is attached to. See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial} argument for description of options.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreReversedSemicirculus}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting a reversed semicirculus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of semicirculus.\\
+ \#2 & string & Type of glyph the semicirculus is attached to. See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial} argument for description of options.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreScoreReference}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Currently does nothing.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSemicirculus}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting a semicirculus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of semicirculus.\\
+ \#2 & string & Type of glyph the semicirculus is attached to. See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial} argument for description of options.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSetBigInitial}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro which indicates that a 2-line initial is desired.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSetFixedNextTextFormat}{\#1}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Same as \verb=\GreSetFixedTextFormat= except for next syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSetFixedTextFormat}{\#1}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to specify a text which is different from \verb=#1#2#3= (of \verb=\GreSyllable=). It is useful for styles, for instance with:
+\par\medskip
+\begin{gabccode}
+ <i>ffj</i>(gh)
+\end{gabccode}
+
+we will have
+
+\begin{latexcode}
+ #1 = \textit{f}
+ #2 = \textit{f}
+ #3 = \textit{j}
+\end{latexcode}
+
+and thus \verb=#1#2#3= will be \verb=\textit{f}\textit{f}\textit{j}=, which won't typeset
+ligatures. In this example we should call \verb=\grefixedtext{\textit{ffj}}=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & nothing (normal text)\\
+ & 1& italic\\
+ & 2 & bold\\
+ & 3 & small caps\\
+ & 4 & typewriter\\
+ & 5 & underline
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSetInitial}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to set the initial in the score.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & character & The initial letter of the score.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSetInitialClef}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for writing initial key.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \texttt{c} or \texttt{f} & Type of clef.\\
+ \#2 & 1--4 & Line of key.\\
+ \#3 & integer & Height number of flat in key (\texttt{0} for no flat).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSetLinesClef}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to define the clef that will appear at the beginning of the lines.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \texttt{c} or \texttt{f} & Type of clef.\\
+ \#2 & 1--4 & Line of key.\\
+ \#3 & 0 & No space after clef.\\
+ & 1 & Space after clef.\\
+ \#4 & integer & Height of flat in key (\texttt{0} for no flat).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSetNextSyllable}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to set the text of the next syllable for spacing purposes.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the first letters of the syllable, that don't count for the alignment\\
+ \#2 & string & the middle letters of the syllable, we must align in the middle of them\\
+ \#3 & string & the end letters, they don't count for alignment\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSetTextAboveLines}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to place argument above the lines and empty
+\verb=\gre@currenttextabovelines= when done.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to be placed above the lines.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSharp}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a sharp.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of the sharp.\\
+ \#2 & 0 & No flat for a key change.\\
+ & 1 & Indicates the flat for a key change.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSmallCaps}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty and gregoriotex.tex}
+Makes argument small capitals. Accesses \LaTeX\ \verb=\textsc= or
+Plain\TeX\ \verb=\sc= as appropriate Corresponds to ``<sc></sc>'' tags
+in gabc.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to be typeset in small caps font.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreStar}{}{gregoriotex-symbol.tex}
+Macro to typeset an asterisk (\GreStar).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreSyllable}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6\#7\#8\#9}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to typeset the syllable.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the first letters of the syllable, that don't count for the alignment\\
+ \#2 & string & the middle letters of the syllable, we must align in the middle of them\\
+ \#3 & string & the end letters, they don't count for alignment\\
+ \#4 & 0 & this syllable is not the end of a word\\
+ & 1 & this syllable is the end of a word\\
+ \#5 & \TeX\ code & macros setting next syllable letters of the next syllable\\
+ \#6 & string & the line, byte offset, and column address for textedit links when point-and-click is enabled\\
+ \#7 & & alignment type of the first next glyph\\
+ \#8 &\TeX\ code & other macros (translation, double text, etc.) that don't fit in the limitation of the number of arguments\\
+ \#9 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyphs & all the notes
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreTilde}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to print $\sim$.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreTranslationCenterEnd}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to end the centering of the translation text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreTypewriter}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty and gregoriotex.tex}
+Makes argument typewriter font. Accesses \LaTeX\ \verb=\texttt= or
+Plain\TeX\ \verb=\tt= as appropriate.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to typeset in typewriter font.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreUnderBrace}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a round brace below the lines.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & The width of the brace.\\
+ \#2 & length & A vertical shift.\\
+ \#3 & length & A horizontal shift.\\
+ \#4 & 0 & Don't shift before starting the brace.\\
+ & 1 & Shift back a punctum's width before starting the brace.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreUnderline}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty and gregoriotex.tex}
+Makes argument underlined under \LaTeX\ using \verb=\underline=. Does
+nothing in Plain\TeX.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to typeset underlined.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreVarBraceLength}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Returns the computed length of the given brace.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & unique identifier for the brace within the score.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreVarBraceSavePos}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Records positions to compute the lengths of variable-sized braces.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & unique identifier for the brace within the score.\\
+ \#2 & 0 & Don't shift before recording the position.\\
+ & 1 & Shift back a punctum's width before recording the position.\\
+ \#3 & 1 & Position to save is the start of brace.\\
+ & 2 & Position to save is the end of brace.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreVEpisemus}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro for typesetting the vertical episemus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & Height number of episemus.\\
+ \#2 & string & Type of glyph the episemus is attached to. See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial} argument for description of options.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreVirgula}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a virgula.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & code & Macros which may happen before the skip but after the virgula (typically \verb=\grevepisemus=).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreWriteTranslation}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to typeset argument in the translation position.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to typeset in the translation.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreWriteTranslationWithCenterBeginning}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to typeset argument (a string) in the translation position (at
+the beginning of a line?).
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to typeset in the translation (at the beginning of a line).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreZeroHyph}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to typeset a zero-width hyphen (the hyphen is visible, it is only
+treated as if it had 0 width). Used for fine tuning spacing
+(especially at line endings).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreForceBreak}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro used to force a line break to occur at a given position.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreNoBreak}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro used to prevent a line break from occurring at a given position.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreScoreId}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A Lua\TeX\ attribute which designates a unique identifier for each score.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreNABCNeumes}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-nabc.tex}
+Macro to print a nabc character above the lines.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & int & the line on which the character should appear (currently unused)\\
+ \#2 & string & The \texttt{nabc} syntax which indicates what neumes are to be printed\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreNABCChar}{\#1}{gregoriotex-nabc.tex}
+Macro to print a nabc character.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The \texttt{nabc} syntax which indicates what neumes are to be printed\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash GreScoreNABCLines}{\#1}{gregoriotex-nabc.tex}
+Macro which sets the number of \texttt{nabc} lines in the score.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & int & the number of \texttt{nabc} lines (currently only 1 is supported)\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: latex
+%%% TeX-master: "GregorioRef"
+%%% End:
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_internal.tex b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_internal.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5cc1f31924c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Command_Index_internal.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1587 @@
+% !TEX root = GregorioRef.tex
+% !TEX program = LuaLaTeX+se
+\section{Gregorio\TeX{} Controls}
+
+These functions are the ones used by Gregorio\TeX{} internally as it
+process the commands listed above. They should not appear in any user
+document and are listed here for programmer documentation purposes
+only.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@error}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Prints an error to the \TeX\ output log.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & error message\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@warning}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Prints a warning to the \TeX\ output log.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & warning message\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@metapost}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Executes \MP{} commands using luamplib.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \MP{} commands & The \MP{} commands to execute.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@deprecated}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro that handles deprecation messages. By default, deprecated macros
+are allowed and a warning is printed. If the package option
+\texttt{deprecated=false} is set, then deprecated macros raise a
+package error, halting \TeX.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & name of the deprecated macro\\
+ \#2 & string & name of the correct macro to use\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@obsolete}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro that handles obsolescence errors.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & name of the obsolete macro\\
+ \#2 & string & name of the correct macro to use\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@loadgregoriofont}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Loads the chosen font for the neumes at the correct size.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@constantglyphraise}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to calculate \verb=\gre@constantglyphraise=
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@addtranslationspace}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to tell Gregorio to set space for the translation.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@removetranslationspace}{}{gregoriotexspaces.tex}
+Macro to tell Gregorio to remove the space allocated to the translation.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@additionalspaces}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro which calculates \verb=\gre@additionalbottomspace= and\\
+\verb=\gre@additionaltopspace=
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & the height number of the top pitch, including signs\\
+ \#2 & integer & the height number of the bottom pitch, including signs\\
+ \#3 & 0 & there is no translation line\\
+ & 1 & there is a translation line\\
+ \#4 & 0 & there is no above lines text\\
+ & 1 & there is above lines text
+ \end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@textaligncenter}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro for calculating \verb=\gre@textaligncenter=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The first part of the syllable (any preceding consonants in Latin).\\
+ \#2 & string & The middle part of the syllable (the vowel in Latin, the whole syllable in English).\\
+ \#3 & 0 & Calculation is being performed for the current syllable.\\
+ & 1 & Calculation is being performed for the next syllable.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@annotationtrueraise}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to calculate \verb=\gre@dimen@annotationtrueraise=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@textlower}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the default value of \texttt{textlower}. Default is \texttt{spacebeneathtext}.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@linewidth}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the default line width. Default is the width of the printable space (\verb=\hsize=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@stafflinewidth}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the default width of the staff lines. Default is \texttt{linewidth}.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@stafflineheight}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the height (thickness) of the staff lines. Dependent on \texttt{stafflineheightfactor} and \texttt{gre@factor}.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@interstafflinespace}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the distance between the staff lines. Dependent on \texttt{stafflineheight} and \texttt{gre@factor}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@stafflinediff}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates a correction factor for when the staff lines are not their default thickness. Dependent on \texttt{stafflineheight} and \texttt{gre@factor}.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@staffheight}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the total height of the staff. Dependent on \texttt{stafflineheight} and \texttt{interstafflinespace}.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@constantglyphraise}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the baseline correction for the glyphs. Dependent on \texttt{gre@factor}, \texttt{additionalbottomspace}, \texttt{spacebeneathtext}, \texttt{spacelinestext}, \texttt{interstafflinespace}, \texttt{stafflineheight}, \texttt{currenttranslationheight}, and \texttt{stafflinediff}.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@computespaces}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Aggregates all of the global distance calculations and calls them in the order needed to respect dependencies.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@glyphraisevalue}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the raise values for a glyph (glyphraisevalue and addedraisevalue) based on where it is to be placed and what kind of a glyph it is. This is a time of use calculation.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & The number for where the glyph is located. \texttt{a} in gabc is 1, \texttt{b} is 2, \etc\\
+ \#2 & 0 & no modification\\
+ & 1 & puts the value on the interline just above if it is on a line\\
+ & 2 & puts the value on the interline just beneath if it is on a line\\
+ & 3 & case of the vertical episemus, which is not placed at the same place if the corresponding note is on a line or not\\
+ & 4 & case of the punctum mora, for the same reason\\
+ & 5 & case of the horizontal episemus under a note, that must be placed a bit lower if the note is on a line\\
+ & 6 & case of the signs above (accentus, \etc)\\
+ & 8 & case of the punctum mora of the first note of a podatus or the 2nd note of a porrectus, \etc\\
+ & 9 & case of the horizontal episemus, that must be placed a bit lower if the note is on a line\\
+ & 10 & case of the low choral sign\\
+ & 11 & case of the high choral sign\\
+ & 12 & case of the low choral sign which is lower than the note\\
+ & 13 & case of the brace above the bars
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@stafflinefactor}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A number indicating the thickness of the staff lines.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@scale@stafflinefactor}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Flag indicating whether the stafflinefactor should scale with changes of grefactor (1), or not (0).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@textaligncenter}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to calculate the distance from the beginning of the text of a syllable to its alignment point (the center of the vowel for Latin centering, the center of the syllable for English centering). This is a time of use calculation.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the first part of the syllable\\
+ \#2 & string & the middle part of the syllable\\
+ \#3 & 0 & perform this calculation for the current syllable\\
+ & 1 & perform this calculation for the next syllable
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@enddifference}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Calculates the difference between the end of the notes and the end of the syllable text. Also stores the value for the previous syllable if needed. This is a time of use calculation.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & the total width of the notes\\
+ \#2 & length & the total width of the syllable text\\
+ \#3 & length & the alignment distance for the text (\texttt{textaligncenter})\\
+ \#4 & length & the alignment distance for the notes (\texttt{notesaligncenter})\\
+ \#5 & 0 & do not save the value for the previous syllable before calculating the new value\\
+ & 1 & save the value for the previous syllable before calculating the new value
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@changeonedimenfactor}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Change the scale of a single distance from one factor to another.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & name of the distance to be scaled. See \nameref{distances}.\\
+ \#2 & integer & the factor the distance is currently in\\
+ \#3 & integer & the factor the distance is to be put into\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@changedimenfactor}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Rescales all the distances (and stafflinefactor) which are supposed to scale with a change in factor.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & the factor the distance is currently in\\
+ \#2 & integer & the factor the distance is to be put into\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@nextbegindifference}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to calculate \texttt{nextbegindifference}.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the first letters of the next syllable\\
+ \#2 & string & the middle letters of the next syllable (the vowel in Latin, the whole syllable in English)\\
+ \#3 & string & the end letters of the next syllable\\
+ \#4 & $0 <$ integer $< 19$ & the type of notes alignment. See \nameref{notesalign}.\\
+ & $20 <$ integer $< 39$ & Same as below 20 except there is a flat before the notes. Subtract 20 to get the type of notes alignment.\\
+ & $40 <$ integer $< 59$ & Same as below 20 except there is a natural before the notes. Subtract 40 to get the type of notes alignment.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@makein}{\#1}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Strips the decimals and units from a distance.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & distance & should be in the form ``[0-9]+.[0-9]+pt''. (\ie the result of applying \verb=\the= to a distance register)
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@makenum}{\#1}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Strips the units from a distance.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & distance & should be in the form ``[0-9]+.[0-9]+pt''. (\ie the result of applying \verb=\the= to a distance register)
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@unitfactor}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Temporary count used by \verb=\gre@convertto=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@basefactor}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Temporary count used by \verb=\gre@convertto=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@count@temp@**}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Temporary count used in calculations. There are currently three of these.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@convertto}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro which converts a distance into a particular set of units. Result is placed in \verb=\gre@converted= as a string.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & two letter abbreviation for the units. Should recognize all legal TeX units.\\
+ \#2 & distance & Distance to be converted.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@converted}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro holding result of last call to \verb=\gre@convertto=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@consistentunits}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+This function takes a distance and formats it as a string so that its units conform to the pattern set by a string representation of a distance. Result is placed in \verb=\gre@stringdist=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the standard whose format is to be matched.\\
+ \#2 & distance & the distance to be adjusted.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@stringdist}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro holding result of last call to \verb=\gre@consistentunits=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gregorioscore}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro that handles \verb=\gregorioscore= calls when they do not have an
+optional argument.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Relative or absolute path to the score.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gregorioscore@option}{[\#1]\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro that handles \verb=\gregorioscore= calls when they have an optional
+argument.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \texttt{n} & \#2 will be included as is. \\
+ & \texttt{a} & Gregoriotex will automatically compile gabc files if necessary.\\
+ & \texttt{f} & Forces gregoriotex to compile the gabc file.\\
+ \#2 & string & Relative or absolute path to the score.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gabcsnippet}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro that handles \verb=\gabcsnippet= calls when they do not have an
+optional argument.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Snippet of gabc code.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gabcsnippet@option}{[\#1]\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro that handles \verb=\gabcsnippet= calls when they have an optional
+argument.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & int & Value of initial style to be passed to gregorio \\
+ \#2 & string & Snippet of gabc code.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@writemode}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro that writes its argument with \verb=\greannotation=. The
+argument typically is given to this macro by \verb=\GreMode= in the
+gtex file.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & Text to place above the initial of a score.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@brace@common}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6\#7}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Common macro used internally to render braces.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & The width of the brace.\\
+ \#2 & length & A vertical shift.\\
+ \#3 & length & A horizontal shift.\\
+ \#4 & 0 & Don't shift before starting the brace.\\
+ & 1 & Shift back a punctum's width before starting the brace.\\
+ \#5 & 0 & No accentus above the brace.\\
+ & 1 & Typeset an accentus above the brace.\\
+ \#6 & integer & The height number for the brace.\\
+ \#7 & csname & The control sequence name representing the brace.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash grebracemetapostpreamble}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Returns the \MP{} preamble for braces. The control sequence name does
+not have the \texttt{@} symbol because this macro is used within \MP{}.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the width of the brace; if \texttt{*}, use the bar brace width.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@draw@curlybrace}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Draws a curly over-brace using \MP{}.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & the width of the brace.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@draw@brace}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Draws a round over-brace using \MP{}.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the width of the brace; if \texttt{*}, use the bar brace width.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@draw@underbrace}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Draws a round under-brace using \MP{}.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & the width of the brace.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@draw@roundbrace}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Draws a round over- or under-brace using \MP{}.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & the width of the brace.\\
+ \#2 & number & the height of the bounding box in em-relative units.\\
+ \#3 & \MP{} commands & \MP{} commands to draw the brace outline.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@iflatex}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Evaluates to \verb=#1= if running under \LaTeX{}.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \TeX{} code & the \TeX{} code to use if running under \LaTeX{}.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@latex@barredsymbol}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Internal method used by \verb=\grelatexsimpledefarredsymbol= to simplify
+the cascading of conditionals used to implement that macro.
+
+\bigskip\textbf{Only available in \LaTeX.}
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the value of \verb=\f@series/\f@shape= to match.\\
+ \#2 & \TeX{} code & the \TeX{} for the base symbol (\ie, \texttt{A}, \texttt{R}, or \texttt{V}).\\
+ \#3 & string & the control sequence name created by \verb=\gredefsizedsymbol= to use for the bar.\\
+ \#4 & dimension & the amount to shift the bar to the left from the end of the base symbol.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@additionalbottomcustoslineend}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to place a bottom custos with an additional line (positions \texttt{a} and \texttt{b}) at the end of a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@additionalbottomcustoslinemiddle}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to place a bottom custos with an additional line (positions \texttt{a} and \texttt{b}) in the middle of a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@additionaltopcustoslineend}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to place a top custos with an additional line (positions \texttt{l} and \texttt{m}) at the end of a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@additionaltopcustoslinemiddle}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to place a top custos with an additional line (positions \texttt{l} and \texttt{m}) in the middle of a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@pickcustos}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to pick the appropriate custos character.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & height of the custos character to be placed\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@addspaceabove}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to increase the space above the lines to account for above lines text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@removespaceabove}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to decrease the space above the lines as there is no longer any above lines text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@alteration}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset an alteration.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & height of the alteration\\
+ \#2 & character alias & the alteration\\
+ \#3 & character alias & the hole of the alteration\\
+ \#4 & 1 & the alteration is a flat for a key change\\
+ & 0 & all other cases\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@clefnum}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro calculating the \verb=\gre@clefnum= from the letter and number.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & charcter & type of clef (\texttt{c} or \texttt{f})\\
+ \#2 & integer & line number\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@clefnum}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Count holding the current clef number.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@clefflat}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to hold the height of the current flat for the clef (\texttt{a} if no flat).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@updatelinesclef}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro redrawing a key from \verb=\gre@clefnum=, useful for vertical space changes.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@currenttextabovelines}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for storing the text which needs to be placed above the lines.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@typesettextabovelines}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for typesetting the text above the lines.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dotranslationcenterend}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to typeset a centered translation.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@drawfirstlines}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to draw the first set of lines in a score (when shortened by an initial).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@generatelines}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to (re)populate the box containing the lines.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@updatelinewidth}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to shorten the lines to account for the presence of the initial.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@knownline}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A count which keeps track of which line of the score we're on.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@lastoflinecount}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Count to track where on the line we are. Values are 0 (we are not near the end of a line), 1 (we're at the last syllable of the line), and 2 (we just set the last syllable of the line and so are at the first syllable of a new line).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@savedlastoflinecount}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A spot to save the \verb=\gre@lastoflinecount= so we can change it temporarily and revert to the saved value later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@newlinecommon}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+The macro which needs to be called each time a new lines is started.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & Justifying the line being ended\\
+ & 1 & Do not justify the line being ended\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endafterbar}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to call after ending a bar.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & We are at the end of a line\\
+ & 1 & We not at the end of a line\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endofsyllable}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro called at end of a syllable, adds a penalty and a space.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & to only add the penalty\\
+ & 1 & otherwise\\
+ \#2 & 0 & if end of syllable\\
+ & 1 & if end of word\\
+ \#3 & 1 & if next syllable is a bar\\
+ & 0 & otherwise\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@exhyphencharsave}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for saving the ex hyphen character so that it can be restored at the end of the score.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@factor}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Count which stores the current staff size.
+
+Default: 17 (approximately the size found in graduals)
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fillhole}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to fill the hole in a glyph so that staff lines do not show through a hole in it.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & Gregorio\TeX\ char & character to use to fill the hole\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@notesaligncenter}{\#1}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to find the alignment center for a group of notes. The value is the distance from the left edge of the group to the alignment point and is stored in \verb=\gre@dimen@notesaligncenter=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & Note alignment type & See \ref{notesalign}\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@nextnotesaligncenter}{\#1}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Same as previous, but for the next syllable.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & Note alignment type & See \ref{notesalign}\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@calculate@simplenotesaligncenter}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Workhorse function behind \verb=\gre@calculate@notesaligncenter= and \verb=\gre@calculate@nextnotesaligncenter=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & Note alignment type & See \ref{notesalign}\\
+ \#2 & 0 & this is for the current syllable\\
+ & 1 & this is for the next syllable\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gregoriofontname}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro which stores the name of the currently selected font for the neumes.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@handleclivisspecialalignment}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro for aligning clivis syllables according to the flag \verb=\gre@clivisalignment=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyph & Glyph to use when aligning clivis on its center\\
+ \#2 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyph & Glyph to use when aligning clivis on the center of the first punctum\\
+ \#3 & 0 & this is for the current syllable\\
+ & 1 & this is for the next syllable\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@hepisorline}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a horizontal line (either an additional staff line or an episemus).
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & character & The letter of the height of the episemus (not the height of the note it corresponds to).\\
+ \#2 & 0 & go back to the beginning of the previous glyph; this starts the episemus at the beginning of the previous glyph\\
+ & 1 & stay at the end of the glyph; doesn't make much sense to use this\\
+ & 2 & go back the width of \#1; this starts the episemus at the glyph from the end that starts at \#1's width from the end\\
+ & 3 & go back to the beginning of the previous glyph and then forward the width of \#1; this starts the episemus at the glyph from the start that starts just after \#1's width from the start\\
+ \#3 & integer &the ambitus for a two note episemus at the diagonal stroke of a porrectus, porrectus flexus, orculus resupinus, or torculus resupinus flexus\\
+ \#4 & 0 & an horizontal episemus\\
+ & 1 & an horizontal episemus under a note\\
+ & 3 & a line at the bottom\\
+ & 2 & a line at the top\\
+ \#5 & f & a normal episemus\\
+ & l & a small episemus aligned left\\
+ & c & a small episemus aligned center\\
+ & r & for a small episemus aligned right\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@hepisorlineaux}{\#1\#2\#3\#4}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro that will help in the typesetting of a horizontal episemus and additional lines.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyph & an offset glyph (see \#3, below)\\
+ \#2 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyph & the episemus glyph\\
+ \#3 & 0 & go back to the beginning of the previous glyph; this starts the episemus at the beginning of the previous glyph\\
+ & 1 & stay at the end of the glyph; doesn't make much sense to use this\\
+ & 2 & go back the width of \#1; this starts the episemus at the glyph from the end that starts at \#1's width from the end\\
+ & 3 & go back to the beginning of the previous glyph and then forward the width of \#1; this starts the episemus at the glyph from the start that starts just after \#1's width from the start\\
+ \#4 & 0 & an horizontal episemus\\
+ & 1 & an horizontal episemus under a note\\
+ & 3 & a line at the bottom\\
+ & 2 & a line at the top\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@vepisemusorrare}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a vertical episemus or a rare accent (like accentus, circulus, etc.). This function must be called after a call to \verb=\GreGlyph=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & character & the letter of the height of the episemus (not the height of the note it corresponds to.\\
+ \#2 & integer & See \nameref{EpisemusSpecial}\\
+ \#3 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyph & the sign glyph\\
+ \#4 & 1 & vertical episemus\\
+ & 2 & rare sign\\
+ & 3 & choral sign\\
+ & 4 & brace above the bar\\
+ \#5 & string & the choral sign, if relevant\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@vepisemusorrareaux}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6\#7}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to help typesetting vertical episemus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & Gregorio\TeX\ glyph & is an offset glyph (see \#3 below)\\
+ \#2 & Gregorio\TeX glyph & the glyph upon which the sign is to be centered\\
+ \#3 & 0 & go back to the beginning of the previous glyph and then forward half the width of \#2; this puts the sign at the beginning of the previous glyph, whose first note is the size of \#2\\
+ & 1 & go back half the width of \#2; this puts the sign at the end of the previous glyph, whose last note is the size of \#2\\
+ & 2 & go back the width of \#1 and then forward half the width of \#2; this puts the sign at the glyph from the end that starts at \#1's width from the end\\
+ & 3 & go back to the beginning of the previous glyph and then forward the width of \#1 and then back half the width of \#2; this puts the sign at the glyph from the start that ends at \#1's width from the start\\
+ \#4 & dimension & a shift that we want to get applied, useful for punctum inclinatum for example\\
+ \#5 & integer & is the glyph number\\
+ \#6 & 1 & vertical episemus\\
+ & 2 & rare sign\\
+ & 3 & choral sign\\
+ & 4 & brace above the bar\\
+ \#7 & string & the choral sign if relevant\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@newglyphcommon}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro called before each glyph.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@normalinitial}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro called at the end of the score to ensure that a big initial setting doesn't carry into the next score.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash greoldcatcode}{}{gregoriotex.tex}
+Macro to store the catcode for ``\@'' so that we can use said symbol in function names under Plain\TeX\ and then restore the original catcode after the package is done loading.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@setstylefont}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for opening up greextra font.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@syllablenotes}{\#1}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro for populating \verb=\gre@box@syllablenotes=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The contents to be placed in the box\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@symbolfontsize}{}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+The font size at which symbols are to be loaded.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@textnormal}{\#1}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which applies the default text format.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@typekey}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro which typesets the key.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & character & the type of the key: c or f\\
+ \#2 & integer & the line of the key (1 is the lowest)\\
+ \#3 & 0 & no need to use small key characters (inside a line)\\
+ & 1 & we must use small key characters (inside a line)\\
+ \#4 & 0 & no extra space is needed after the key\\
+ & 1 & we must type a space after the key\\
+ \#5 & integer & if 3, it means that we must not put a flat after the key, otherwise it's the height of the flat\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@updateleftbox}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to update the box printed a the left end of every line (the one which holds the staff lines).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@usestylecommon}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro which specifies the alternate glyphs which are common to all of the styles.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@widthof}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for calculating the width of its argument and storing it in \verb=\gre@dimen@temp@three=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@writebar}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to write a bar.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & virgula\\
+ & 1 & minima\\
+ & 2 & minor\\
+ & 3 & major\\
+ & 4 & finalis\\
+ & 5 & the last finalis\\
+ \#2 & 0 & in a syllable containing only this bar\\
+ & 1 & in a syllable containing other notes\\
+ \#3 & \TeX\ code & macros that may happen before the skip after the bar (typically GreVEpisemus)\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@@arg}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+A dummy macro which is used to store a macro which takes an argument so that it can be used in a \verb=\ifx= comparison. The value of the argument is provided at the time this macro is created.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nothing}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A dummy macro which has not contents. Used for \verb=\ifx= comparisons.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@annotation}{[\#1]\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Workhorse function behind \verb=\greannotation=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \texttt{c} & center align the new line with the existing annotation content\\
+ & \texttt{l} & left align the new line with the existing annotation content\\
+ & \texttt{r} & right align the new line with the existing annotation content\\
+ \#2 & string & the new annotation content\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@atletter}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A Lua\TeX\ catcode table which makes sure that Lua\TeX\ treats `@' corectly.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@baseunit}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The units attached to base dimension in a string distance. These units are extracted as part of coercing one distance to have the same units as another (\verb=\gre@consistentunits=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@stretchunit}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The units attached to stretch dimension in a string distance. These units are extracted as part of coercing one distance to have the same units as another (\verb=\gre@consistentunits=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@shrinkunit}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The units attached to shrink dimension in a string distance. These units are extracted as part of coercing one distance to have the same units as another (\verb=\gre@consistentunits=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@bug}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Macro for raising a bug error when some calculation goes awry and comes up with a non-sensical result. Generally will be found in Lua code, not \TeX\ code.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@changestyle}{\#1\#2[\#3]}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Workhorse function behind \verb=\grechangestyle=. Necessary because the internals of the definition are slightly different in \LaTeX\ and Plain\TeX.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@compute@bolshift}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro used in \verb=\GreSyllable=. Sets \verb=\gre@skip@bolshift= to the left kern that should appear at the beginning of a line in case of a forced linebreak. The goal of this left kern is to have all lines aligned on notes.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & dimension & \verb=\gre@dimen@begindifference= of the first syllable of the line\\
+ \#2 & 0 & No need to worry about a Lua\TeX\ bug\\
+ & 1 & Apply correction for Lua\TeX\ bug\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@compute@eolshift}{\#1}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro used in \verb=\GreSyllable=. Sets \verb=\gre@skip@eolshift= to the left kern that
+should appear before an end of line. The improvement is tiny: when
+text go further than notes in the last syllable of a line, the idea
+is to allow text to go a bit further right, under the custos.
+\verb=\gre@skip@eolshift= should be called at the end of the last syllable of the
+line, just before the linebreak penalty, so that LaTeX believes the
+line is a bit shorter, and expands it more.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & dimension & The \verb=\gre@dimen@enddifference= of the corresponding syllable\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@compute@syllablefinalskip}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro computing the skip at the end of the syllable.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & if end of syllable\\
+ & 1 & if end of word\\
+ \#2 & 0 & if next syllable is normal\\
+ & 1 & if it's a bar\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@convert}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro to hold the original distance which is to be scaled by \verb=\gre@changeonedimenfactor=
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@debug}{}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Macro to hold the list of debug messages which should be designated as printing.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@debugmsg}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to print debugging messages.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The category of the message (used in conjunction with \verb=\gre@debug= to determine whether to print the message or not\\
+ \#2 & string & The debug message\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@declarefileversion}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro which checks for version consistency between Gregorio\TeX\ files.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & name of the current file\\
+ \#2 & string & version of the current file\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@def@char@he}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+Macro for defining the various types of horizontal episema.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & name of the horizontal episemus to be defined\\
+ \#2 & string & Camel case name of horizontal episemus to be defined\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@def@char@he@porr}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+Macro for defining the various types of horizontal episema porrectus.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & name of the horizontal episemus porrectus to be defined\\
+ \#2 & string & Camel case name of horizontal episemus porrectus to be defined\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@cavum}{\#1\#2\#3\#4\#5\#6\#7\#8}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to typeset a "cavum" character.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & length & Argument \#2 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height to raise the glyph.\\
+ \#2 & length & Argument \#3 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. Height of the next note.\\
+ \#3 & integer & Argument \#4 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The type of glyph.\\
+ \#4 & \TeX\ code & Macros executed before the punctum cavum is written.\\
+ \#5 & character & Argument \#5 from \verb=\GreGlyph=. The signs to typeset before the glyph.\\
+ \#6 & string & the line, byte offset, and column address for textedit links when point-and-click is enabled.\\
+ \#7 & control sequence & The control sequence for the glyph.\\
+ \#8 & control sequence & The control sequence for the hole glyph.
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@get@spaceskip}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Loads \verb=\gre@skip@temp@four= with the appropriate rubber length given the
+desired case.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & 0 & Default space.\\
+ & 1 & Zero-width space.\\
+ & 2 & Space between flat or natural and a note.\\
+ & 3 & Space between two puncta inclinata.\\
+ & 4 & Space between bivirga or trivirga.\\
+ & 5 & space between bistropha or tristropha.\\
+ & 6 & Space after a punctum mora XXX: not used yet, not so sure it is a good idea\ldots\\
+ & 7 & Space between a punctum inclinatum and a punctum inclinatum debilis.\\
+ & 8 & Space between two puncta inclinata debilis.\\
+ & 9 & Space before a punctum (or something else) and a punctum inclinatum.\\
+ & 10 & Space between puncta inclinata (also debilis for now), larger ambitus (range=3rd).\\
+ & 11 & Space between puncta inclinata (also debilis for now), larger ambitus (range=4th or more).\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nabcfontname}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro which stores the name of the currently selected font for \texttt{nabc}.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nabcfontsize}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro which stores the size of the currently selected font for \texttt{nabc}.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endsyllablepart}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which stores the end part of the current syllable (that which comes after the alignment part).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@firstsyllablepart}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which stores the first part of the current syllable (that which comes before the alignment part).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@middlesyllablepart}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which stores the middle part of the current syllable (the part which aligns with the notes).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nextendsyllablepart}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which stores the end part of the next syllable (that which comes after the alignment part).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nextfirstsyllablepart}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which stores the first part of the next syllable (that which comes before the alignment part).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nextmiddlesyllablepart}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which stores the middle part of the next syllable (the part which aligns with the notes).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fixedtextformat}{\#1}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+A macro which applies formatting that needs to apply to the whole syllable (rather than the parts individually) for the current syllable. Necessary to preserve ligatures across parts within a syllable.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The syllable (usually built as \verb=\gre@firstsyllablepart\gre@middlesyllablepart\gre@endsyllablepart=\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fixednexttextformat}{\#1}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+A macro which applies formatting that needs to apply to the whole syllable (rather than the parts individually) for the next syllable. Necessary to preserve ligatures across parts within a syllable.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & The syllable (usually built as \verb=\gre@nextfirstsyllablepart\gre@nextmiddlesyllablepart\gre@nextendsyllablepart=\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gabcname}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro which holds the point-and-click file name.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gregoriotexluaversion}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to hold the version number of \emph{gregoriotex.lua} so that it can be checked for consistency.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gregorioversion}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to hold the version number of Gregorio\TeX\ so that it can be checked for consistency.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@leftfill}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro set to \verb=\hfil= or \verb=\relax= depending on alignment choices.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@rightfill}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro set to \verb=\hfil= or \verb=\relax= depending on alignment choices.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@mark@abovelinestext}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to set the point-and-click position for above lines text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@mark@translation}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to set the point-and-click position for translations.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@pitch@[a-p]}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macros which map gabc pitch letters (the final part of the macro name) to the numerical value that Gregorio\TeX\ uses in processing note placement.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@pitch@adjust@top}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+If any note appears above this pitch, the space above the lines must be adjusted to account for it.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@pitch@adjust@bottom}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+If any note appears below this pitch, the space below the lines must be adjusted to account for it.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@pointandclick}{\#1\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to generate the point-and-click links.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \TeX\ code & the entity which is to contain the link\\
+ \#2 & link target & line:char:column for the link\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@prefix}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Either ``skip'' or ``dimen'' according to the distance being set or changed at the given moment.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@rubberpermit}{\#1}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Determines whether the given distance is allowed to take a rubber length.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & the name of the distance to check\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@setgregoriofont}{[\#1]\#2}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Workhorse function behind \verb=\gresetgregoriofont=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & \textit{(omitted)} & Use the normal font and rule set (default).\\
+ & op & Use the alternate Dominican font/rule set.\\
+ \#2 & greciliae & Use the Greciliae font (default).\\
+ & gregorio & Use the Gregorio font.\\
+ & parmesan & Use the Parmesan font.\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@syllable@end}{\#1\#2\#3}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro to make a few checks and call the right macros between \verb=\endbeforebar, \endofword, \endofsyllable=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & & next syllable type (\#7 of \verb=\GreSyllable=)\\
+ \#2 & string & next syllable text\\
+ \#3 & 0 & this syllable is not the end of a word\\
+ & 1 & this syllable is the end of a word\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@typeout}{\#1}{gregoriotex.sty \textup{and} gregoriotex.tex}
+Macro which points to \verb=\typeout= in \LaTeX\ or \verb=\message= in Plain\TeX.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@unsetfixedtextformat}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which changes \verb=\gre@fixedtextformat= back to normal text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@unsetfixednexttextformat}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Macro which changes \verb=\gre@fixednexttextformat= back to normal text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gregoriotex@symbols@loaded}{}{gregoriotex-symbols.tex}
+Empty macro which is used to determine if the symbols have been loaded and prevent loading them again if they have.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@hskip}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Alias for \verb=\hskip= or \verb=\kern=. We use this rather than those functions directly so that the same element can appear in discretionaries where \verb=\kern= is allowed but \verb=\hskip= is not by simply changing the assignment of this macro when we enter one.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@localleftbox}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Alias for \verb=\luatexlocalleftbox=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@localrightbox}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Alias for \verb=\luatexlocalrightbox=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@resizebox}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Alias for \verb=\resizebox=.
+
+\subsection{Auxiliary File}
+Gregorio\TeX\ creates its own auxiliary file (extension \texttt{gaux}) which it uses to store information between successive typesetting runs. This allows for such features as the dynamic interline spacing. The following functions are used to interact with that auxiliary file.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@gaux}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+The handle for the auxiliary file.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@open@gaux}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for opening the auxiliary file.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@close@gaux}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for closing the auxiliary file.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@write@gaux}{\#1}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro for writing the auxiliary file.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & string & contents to be written to the auxiliary file\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+
+\subsection{Fonts}
+Gregorio\TeX\ loads a number of fonts which are referred to by the following macros.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@font@music}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+The font for the neumes.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@font@style}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+The font for some of the extra characters, such as the bar for barred letters.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@font@nabc}{}{gregoriotex-nabc.tex}
+The font for ancient notation.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@font@biginitial}{}{gregoriotex.tex}
+The font for the default big initial format in Plain\TeX.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@font@initial}{}{gregoriotex.tex}
+The font for the default initial format in Plain\TeX.
+
+
+\subsection{Character Reference Aliases}
+To make referencing and changing them easier, Gregorio\TeX\ stores reference information for certain characters using the following macros.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@abovebarbrace}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The above bar brace.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@flat}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The flat character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@flathole}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The flat hole character (\ie, the character needed to prevent lines from showing through the center of the flat).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@natural}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The natural character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@naturalhole}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The natural hole character (\ie, the character needed to prevent lines from showing through the center of the natural).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@sharp}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The sharp character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@sharphole}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The sharp hole character (\ie, the character needed to prevent lines from showing through the center of the sharp).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@punctumcavum}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The punctum cavum character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@punctumcavumhole}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The punctum cavum hole character (\ie, the character needed to prevent lines from showing through the center of the punctum cavum).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@lineapunctumcavum}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The linea punctum cavum character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@lineapunctumcavumhole}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The linea punctum cavum hole character (\ie, the character needed to prevent lines from showing through the center of the linea punctum cavum).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@incclef}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The \texttt{c}-clef which appears in the middle of a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@infclef}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The \texttt{f}-clef which appears in the middle of a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@cclef}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The \texttt{c}-clef which appears at the beginning of a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@fclef}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The \texttt{f}-clef which appears at the beginning of a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@punctum}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The punctum character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@punctummora}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The punctum mora character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@underbrace}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The under brace character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@verticalepisemus}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The vertical episemus character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@brace}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The (rounded) brace character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@curlybrace}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The curly brace character.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@custosbottomlong}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The custos character with a long upwards directed vigra.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@custosbottommiddle}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The custos character with a middle upwards directed vigra.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@custosbottomshort}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The custos character with a short upwards directed vigra.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@custostoplong}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The custos character with a long downwards directed vigra.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@custostopmiddle}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The custos character with a middle downwards directed vigra.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@custostopshort}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+The custos character with a short downwards directed vigra.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@divisiofinalis}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The divisio finalis.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@fontchar@divisiomaior}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+The divisio maior.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@normalhyphen}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A normal hyphen in the text font.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@fuse@debilis}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+A fused character consisting of a leading punctum initio debilis (of ambitus one) and a regular punctum.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@fuse@oriscus@one}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+A fused character consisting of a leading oriscus (of ambitus one) and a regular punctum.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@fuse@oriscus@two}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+A fused character consisting of a leading oriscus (of ambitus two) and a regular punctum.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@fuse@punctum@one}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+A fused character consisting of a leading punctum (of ambitus one) and a regular punctum.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@fuse@punctum@two}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+A fused character consisting of a leading punctum (of ambitus two) and a regular punctum.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@fuse@quilisma@one}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+A fused character consisting of a leading quilisma (of ambitus one) and a regular punctum.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@fuse@quilisma@two}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+A fused character consisting of a leading quilisma (of ambitus two) and a regular punctum.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@char@he@...}{\#1}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+A class of macros for the horizontal episema which populates the \verb=\gre@box@hep= box.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Flags}
+
+Flags are either boolean (defined with \verb=\newif=), Lua\TeX\ attributes, or counts (defined with \verb=\newcount=). They store settings and/or the current state of something so that Gregorio\TeX\ can typeset things in the desired manner.
+
+All distances in \nameref{distances} have a flag associated with them, of the form \verb=\gre@scale@*=. This flag
+indicates if the distance should scale when the staff size changes (1)
+or not (0).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@checklength}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Boolean used in \verb=\gresetdim= to indicate if we are attempting to set a rubber length.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@rubber}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Boolean used in \verb=\gre@changeonedimenfactor= to indicate if we are dealing with one of the distances which can accept a rubber length.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@stretch}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Boolean used in \verb=\gre@changeonedimenfactor= as we test for the presence of a stretch.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@shrink}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Boolean used in \verb=\gre@changeonedimenfactor= as we test for the presence of a shrink.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@vowelcentering}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Boolean used to specify whether the center of the vowel or the center of the syllable is used to align the lyrics with their neumes.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@translationcentering}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean used to specify whether the translation text should be centered below its respective syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@showlines}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean used to specify whether the staff lines should be shown or not.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@hidepclines}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Boolean used to specify whether the staff lines behind a punctum cavum should be hidden.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@hidealtlines}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Boolean used to specify whether the staff lines behind an alteration should be hidden.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@hepisemusbridge}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Boolean used to specify whether adjacent horizontal episema should be joined together.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@drawbraces}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Boolean used to specify whether braces should be drawn by \MP{} as
+opposed to rendered via the score font.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@biginitial}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Count to track whether the initial is big (2-lines) or normal (1-line).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@boxing}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Boolean to track whether we're placing the contents of syllable notes into their box or actually printing that box (helps prevent spurious spaces from occurring when the box is being filled but not printed).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@mustdotranslationcenterend}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean to track whether we must do translation centering.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@endofscore}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Boolean to mark the last syllable of the score.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@firstglyph}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Boolean that tells us if the current glyph is the first glyph or not.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@attr@dash}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A Lua\TeX\ attribute which indicates whether a syllable takes a dash if it ends a line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@attr@center}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A Lua\TeX\ attribute which indicates the type of translation centering.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@attr@glyph@id}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A Lua\TeX\ attribute which identifies the glyph we are at. Used for dynamic line spacing.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@attr@glyph@top}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A Lua\TeX\ attribute which identifies the high point of the glyph. Used for dynamic line spacing.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@attr@glyph@bottom}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A Lua\TeX\ attribute which identifies the low point of the glyph. Used for dynamic line spacing.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@clivisalignment}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Count to indicate how the clivis is to be aligned with its respective syllable text. Values: 0) always align clivis on its center; 1) align clivis on first punctum; 2) align clivis on its center, except if notes would go left of text or consonants after vowels are larger than \verb=\gre@dimen@clivisalignmentmin=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@insidediscretionary}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro which indicates whether we are currently inside a discretionary (1) or not (0). Cannot be converted to a \TeX\ boolean because it's value needs to be passed to Lua.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@isonaline}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Boolean which indicates whether the current note is on a line or not (used to adjust the height of some symbols so they won't print on a line).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@lastispunctum}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Boolean which indicates if the most recent note was a punctum mora.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@lastispunctumsave}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Boolean for storing \verb=\ifgre@lastispunctum= so that it can be restored later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nlbstate}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro which indicates if we are in a no line break area due to translation centering (1), an explicit no line break designation in the gabc (2), or not at all (0).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nlbinitialstate}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to store \verb=\gre@nlbstate= as we initialize or end a no line break area so that we can manipulate said flag as part of the process.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@usestylefont}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which specifies whether the style font should be loaded or not.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@keeprightbox}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Boolean which specifies if we have to keep the localrightbox until the end.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@compilegabc}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro which specifies the default compilation behavior: never compile (0), auto compile (1), or always compile (2).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@nabcfontloaded}{}{gregoriotex-nabc.tex}
+Boolean which indicates whether the \texttt{nabc} font has been loaded.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@generate@pointandclick}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Count which indicates whether the point-and-click functionality should be implemented (1) or not (0). Not a boolean because it needs to be readable by Lua.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@variableheightexpansion}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Count to indicated if the spacing between lines should be variable (1) or fixed (0). Not a boolean because it needs to be readable by Lua.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@blockeolcustos}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which indicates whether the custos at the end of the line should be blocked.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@breakintranslation}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which indicates if line breaks are allowed inside a translation.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@bolshiftsenabled}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which indicates if the left shift for the first syllables of lines is enabled.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@eolshiftsenabled}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which indicates if the left shift for the last syllables of lines is enabled.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@euouae@implies@nlba}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which indicates if line breaks are prohibited in an \texttt{euouae} area.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@in@euouae}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which indicates that we are in an \texttt{euouae} area.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@justifylastline}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which indicates that the last line of the score should be justified.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash ifgre@showclef}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Boolean which indicates that the clef should be visible.
+
+
+
+
+\subsection{Boxes}
+
+Boxes are used to store elements of the score before they are printed for the purposes of reusing them and/or measuring them in order to determine their appropriate placement.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@hep}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+Box for horizontal episemi.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@temp@width}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Box for holding an element in order to determine its width.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@initial}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Box which holds the initial of the score.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@annotation}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Box holding the annotation which goes above the initial.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@annotation@add}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Box used for the new line to be added to the annotation.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@annotation@old}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Box used for the existing lines in the annotation when a new line is being added.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@lines}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Box holding the staff lines.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@temp@sign}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Box to hold a sign so we can measure it for placement.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@syllablenotes}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Box holding the notes associated with a syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@syllabletext}{}{gregoriotex-syllable.tex}
+Box holding the text associated with a syllable.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@box@hep}{}{gregoriotex-chars.tex}
+Box holding the horizontal episemus.
+
+
+\subsection{Distances}
+All of the distances listed in \nameref{distances} have an internal
+associated with them, of the form of \verb=\gre@*@*=, which stores the value of the distance (in
+string representation). The first wildcard is either \texttt{skip} or \texttt{dimen} according to the distance type, while the second is the name of the distance.
+
+These additional distances are calculated by Gregorio based on the values for the user customizable distances and what may be going on in the score at the time of their use.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@clefwidth}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Width of the clef.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@constantglyphraise}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the space between the 0 of the gregorian fonts and the effective 0 of the TeX score.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@currenttranslationheight}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the space for the translation beneath the text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@stafflinewidth}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the width of a line of staff. Can vary, for
+example, at the first line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@linewidth}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the width of the score (including initial).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@additionalbottomspace}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing extra space below the staff needed for low notes.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@additionaltopspace}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing extra space above the staff needed for high notes.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@textlower}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the height of the separation between the 0th
+line (which is invisible except for notes in the a or b position) and
+the bottom of the text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@textaligncenter}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the width from the beginning of the letters in
+a syllable to the middle of the middle letters. Used for lining up
+neumes and syllables.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@additionalleftspace}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the additional space that has to be added to
+the localleftbox for a big initial (one taking two lines).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@initialwidth}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the width of the initial (and the space after).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@currentabovelinestextheight}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Dimension representing the space allocated above the lines for text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@staffheight}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The total height of the staff including the width of the lines and the spaces between them.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@stafflinediff}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Distance representing the difference between the actual size of the staff lines and the ``standard'' size.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@stafflineheight}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The height of the staff line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@interstafflinespace}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The space between the lines.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@glyphraisevalue}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The value that a particular glyph must be raised to be set in the correct position.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@addedraisevalue}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The additional raise needed for the vertical episema and the puncta.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@enddifference}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Distance from the end of the notes to the end of the text for the previous syllable. Positive values when notes go further than text, negative in the other case.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@previousenddifference}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Stored value of enddifference prior to the current one.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@skip@nextbegindifference}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The difference between the start of the notes and the start of the text for the next syllable. Positive when when text begins first, negative in other case.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@begindifference}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The difference between the start of the notes and the start of the text for the current syllable. Positive when when text begins first, negative in other case.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@lastglyphwidth}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The width of the last glyph.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@notesaligncenter}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Distance from beginning of notes to their point of alignment.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@temp@**}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Temporary dimensions used in calculations. There are currently five of these.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@skip@temp@**}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Temporary skips used in calculations. There are currently four of these.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@unit}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Temporary dimension used by \verb=\gre@convertto=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@base}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Temporary dimension used by \verb=\gre@convertto=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@maxlen}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Distance holding the maximum legal length in TeX.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@savedglyphraise}{}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to hold the value of the glyph raise so that it can be restored after some calculations which may change it are performed.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@skip@eolshift}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The left kern that should appear before an end of line.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@bolshift}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The left kern that should appear at the beginning of line in case of a forced line break.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dimen@annotationtrueraise}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The distance from the baseline of the initial to the baseline of the annotation.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@minTextDistance}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Minimum distance between text (meaningful alias for \verb=\gre@skip@temp@one= inside \verb=\gre@compute@syllablefinalskip=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@minNotesDistance}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Minimum distance between notes (meaningful alias for \verb=\gre@skip@temp@two= inside \verb=\gre@compute@syllablefinalskip=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@curTextDistance}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Current distance between text (meaningful alias for \verb=\gre@dimen@temp@three= inside \verb=\gre@compute@syllablefinalskip=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@curNotesDistance}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Current distance between notes (meaningful alias for \verb=\gre@dimen@temp@four= inside \verb=\gre@compute@syllablefinalskip=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@minShiftText}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Minimum shift required for the text (meaningful alias for \verb=\gre@skip@temp@three= inside \verb=\gre@compute@syllablefinalskip=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@minShiftNotes}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Minimum shift required for the notes (meaningful alias for \verb=\gre@skip@temp@four= inside \verb=\gre@compute@syllablefinalskip=).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@save@parfillskip}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+Macro to store \verb=\parfillskip= value so that we can restore it at the end of the score (needed to force the last line of a score to be justified).
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@scaledist}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Working alias for \verb=\gre@skip@temp@one= or \verb=\gre@dimen@temp@one=, as appropriate, used when rescaling a distance due to a change in \verb=\gre@factor=.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@skip@syllablefinalskip}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+The final distance to skip at the end of a syllable.
+
+
+\subsection{Penalties}
+These are the macros that Gregorio\TeX\ uses to manipulate the penalties in order to control line and page breaks within a score without affect the surrounding text.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@penalty}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Top level function that aliases \verb=\gre@truepenalty= or \verb=\gre@falsepenalty= according to whether penalties should be in play or not.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & The penalty to be applied or gobbled\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@truepenalty}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Alias for \verb=\penalty=.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & The penalty to be applied\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@falsepenalty}{\#1}{gregoriotex-signs.tex}
+Macro to gobble (suppress) its argument.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ \#1 & integer & The penalty to be gobbled\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@cancelpenalties}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro called at the beginning of the score to swap text penalties for score penalties.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@restorepenalties}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro called at the end of the score to restore the text penalties.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@dofinetuning}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro called at the beginning of the score to swap text penalties for score penalties.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endfinetuning}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+Macro called at the end of the score to restore the text penalties.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@brokenpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the broken penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@clubpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the club penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@widowpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the widow penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@emergencystretchsave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the emergency stretch so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endafterbarpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the end after bar penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endafterbaraltpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the alternate end after bar penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endofelementpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the end of element penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endofsyllablepenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the end of syllable penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@endofwordpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the end of word penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@exhyphenpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the ex hyphen penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@hyphenpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex \textup{and} gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the hyphen penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@nobreakpenaltysave}{}{gregoriotex-main.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the no break penalty so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@doublehyphendemeritssave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the double hyphen demerits so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@finalhyphendemeritssave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the final hyphen demerits so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@loosenesssave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the looseness so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@tolerancesave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the tolerance so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash gre@pretolerancesave}{}{gregoriotex-spaces.tex}
+A place to save the current value of the pretolerance so that we can change it temporarily and then restore it later.
+
+
+
+\subsection{\LaTeX/Plain\TeX\ compatibility}
+While every effort has been made to use only primitives which are compatible with both \LaTeX\ and Plain\TeX, it is sometimes necessary to use primitives which are defined for one but not the other (usually its \LaTeX\ that has what we need built in). In these cases we have to provide an equivalent macro to the \TeX\ version which is lacking.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash MessageBreak}{}{gregoriotex.tex}
+Creates a line break in typeout, warning, bug, and error messages. Copied from \LaTeX\ source.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash protect}{}{gregoriotex.tex}
+Prints the name of the macro, rather than its contents in typeout, warning, bug, and error messages. Copied from \LaTeX\ source.
+
+\macroname{\textbackslash f@size}{}{gregoriotex.tex}
+Macro which stores the current font size.
+
+
+\section{Special arguments}
+
+These arguments are used by multiple functions and take a lot of space
+to describe so we describe them once here and refer to this section
+rather than have multiple definitions.
+
+\subsection{Note Alignment Type}\label{notesalign}
+\rowcolors{1}{lightgray}{lightgray}
+\begin{tabular}{cp{10.5cm plus .5cm}}
+ \multicolumn{2}{c}{Integer with the following possibilities:} \\
+ \hline
+ 0 & one-note glyph or more than two notes glyph except porrectus : here we must put the aligncenter in the middle of the first note\\
+ 1 & two notes glyph (podatus is considered as a one-note glyph) : here we put the aligncenter in the middle of the glyph\\
+ 2 & porrectus : has a special align center\\
+ 3 & initio-debilis : same as 1 but the first note is much smaller\\
+ 4 & case of a glyph starting with a quilisma\\
+ 5 & case of a glyph starting with an oriscus\\
+ 6 & case of a punctum inclinatum\\
+ 7 & case of a stropha\\
+ 8 & flexus with an ambitus of one\\
+ 9 & flexus deminutus\\
+ 10 & virgula\\
+ 11 & divisio minima, minor and maior\\
+ 12 & divisio finalis
+ \end{tabular}
+
+\subsection{Episemus Special}\label{EpisemusSpecial}
+\definecolor{shadecolor}{named}{lightgray}%
+\begin{shaded*}%
+\vspace{-1.4\baselineskip}
+\begin{center}String with the following possibilities:\end{center}
+\vspace{-0.8\baselineskip}
+\hrule
+\vspace{-0.8\baselineskip}
+\begin{description}
+ \item[FinalPunctum] Last note, which is a standard punctum (works with pes).
+ \item[FinalDeminutus] Same, but the last note is a deminutus.
+ \item[PenultBeforePunctumWide] The note before the last note, which is a standard punctum.
+ \item[PenultBeforeDeminutus] Idem, but the note is the note preceding a deminutus.
+ \item[AntepenultBeforePunctum] The note before the note before the last note (for porrectus flexus).
+ \item[AntepenultBeforeDeminutus] Idem, but when the two last notes are a deminutus.
+ \item[InitialPunctum] The first note, if it is a standard punctum.
+ \item[InitioDebilis] The first note, if it is an initio debilis.
+ \item[PorrNonAuctusInitialWide] first note of a non-auctus porrectus with a second ambitus of at least two.
+ \item[PorrNonAuctusInitialOne] first note of a non-auctus porrectus with a second ambitus of one
+ \item[PorrAuctusInitialAny] first note of an auctus porrectus, regardless of second ambitus
+ \item[FinalInclinatum] punctum inclinatum as last note
+ \item[FinalInclinatumDeminutus] punctum inclinatum deminutus as last note
+ \item[FinalStropha] stropha as last note
+ \item[FinalQuilisma] quilisma as last note
+ \item[FinalOriscus] oriscus as last note
+ \item[PenultBeforePunctumOne] second-to-last note, with a second ambitus of one, when last note is a standard punctum (like the second note of ghg)
+ \item[FinalUpperPunctum] "upper smaller punctum" as last note (concerning simple podatus, podatus, and torculus resupinus)
+ \item[InitialOriscus] oriscus as first note, disconnected from next note
+ \item[InitialQuilisma] quilisma as first note, disconnected from next note
+ \item[TorcResNonAuctusSecondWideWide] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with a punctum, with a first and second ambitus of at least two
+ \item[TorcResNonAuctusSecondOneWide] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with a punctum, with a first ambitus of one and a second ambitus of at least two
+ \item[TorcResDebilisNonAuctusSecondAnyWide] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus initio debilis with any first ambitus and a second ambitus of at least two
+ \item[FinalLineaPunctum] linea punctum (cavum) as last note
+ \item[BarStandard] standard bar
+ \item[BarVirgula] virgula
+ \item[BarDivisioFinalis] divisio finalis
+ \item[TorcResQuilismaNonAuctusSecondWideWide] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with a quilisma, with a first and second ambitus of at least two
+ \item[TorcResOriscusNonAuctusSecondWideWide] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with an oriscus, with a first and second ambitus of at least two
+ \item[TorcResQuilismaNonAuctusSecondOneWide] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with a quilisma, with a first ambitus of one and and second ambitus of at least two
+ \item[TorcResOriscusNonAuctusSecondOneWide] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with an oriscus, with a first ambitus of one and and second ambitus of at least two
+ \item[TorcResNonAuctusSecondWideOne] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with a punctum, with a first ambitus of at least two and a second ambitus of one
+ \item[TorcResDebilisNonAuctusSecondAnyOne] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus initio debilis with any first ambitus and a second ambitus of one
+ \item[TorcResQuilismaNonAuctusSecondWideOne] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with a quilisma, with a first ambitus of at least two and a second ambitus of one
+ \item[TorcResOriscusNonAuctusSecondWideOne] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with an oriscus, with a first ambitus of at least two and a second ambitus of one
+ \item[TorcResNonAuctusSecondOneOne] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with a punctum, with a first and second ambitus of one
+ \item[TorcResQuilismaNonAuctusSecondOneOne] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with a quilisma, with a first and second ambitus of one
+ \item[TorcResOriscusNonAuctusSecondOneOne] second note of a non-auctus torculus resupinus starting with an oriscus, with a first and second ambitus of one
+ \item[TorcResAuctusSecondWideAny] second note of an auctus torculus resupinus starting with a punctum, with a first ambitus of at least two and any second ambitus
+ \item[TorcResDebilisAuctusSecondAnyAny] second note of an auctus torculus resupinus initio debilis with any first and second ambitus
+ \item[TorcResQuilismaAuctusSecondWideAny] second note of an auctus torculus resupinus starting with a quilisma, with a first ambitus of at least two and any second ambitus
+ \item[TorcResOriscusAuctusSecondWideAny] second note of an auctus torculus resupinus starting with an oriscus, with a first ambitus of at least two and any second ambitus
+ \item[TorcResAuctusSecondOneAny] second note of an auctus torculus resupinus starting with a punctum, with a first ambitus of one and any second ambitus
+ \item[TorcResQuilismaAuctusSecondOneAny] second note of an auctus torculus resupinus starting with a quilisma, with a first ambitus of one and any second ambitus
+ \item[TorcResOriscusAuctusSecondOneAny] second note of an auctus torculus resupinus starting with an oriscus, with a first ambitus of one and any second ambitus
+ \item[ConnectedPenultBeforePunctumWide] second-to-last note connected to prior note, with a second ambitus of at least two, when last note is a standard punctum (like the second note of \textit{gig})
+ \item[ConnectedPenultBeforePunctumOne] second-to-last note connected to prior note, with a second ambitus of one, when last note is a standard punctum (like the second note of \textit{gih})
+ \item[InitialConnectedPunctum] standard punctum as first note, connected to next higher note
+ \item[InitialConnectedVirga] "virga" as first note, connected to next lower note
+ \item[InitialConnectedQuilisma] quilisma as first note, connected to next higher note
+ \item[InitialConnectedOriscus] oriscus as first note, connected to next higher note
+ \item[FinalConnectedPunctum] punctum as last note, connected to prior higher note
+ \item[FinalConnectedAuctus] auctus as last note, connected to prior lower note
+ \item[FinalVirgaAuctus] virga aucta as last note
+ \item[FinalConnectedVirga] "virga" as last note, connected to prior lower note
+ \item[InitialVirga] "virga" as first note, disconnected from next note
+\end{description}
+\end{shaded*}
+
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: latex
+%%% TeX-master: "GregorioRef"
+%%% End:
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Gabc.tex b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Gabc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64c5d97a32f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Gabc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+\section{The GABC File}
+
+gabc is a simple notation based exclusively on ASCII characters that
+enables the user to describe Gregorian chant scores. The name
+\textit{gabc} was given in reference to the
+\href{http://www.walshaw.plus.com/abc/}{ABC} notation for modern
+music.
+
+The gabc notation was developed by a monk of the
+\href{http://www.barroux.org}{Abbey of Sainte Madeleine du Barroux}
+and has been improved by Élie Roux and by other monks of the same
+abbey to produce the best possible notation.
+
+This section will cover the elements of a gabc file.
+
+\subsection{File Structure}
+Files written in gabc have the extension \texttt{.gabc} and have the
+following structure:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+name: incipit;
+gabc-copyright: copyright on this gabc file;
+score-copyright: copyright on the source score;
+office-part: introitus/...;
+occasion: in church calendar;
+meter: for metrical hymns;
+commentary: source of words;
+arranger: name of arranger;
+gabc-version: 0.9.3;
+author: if known;
+date: xi c;
+manuscript: ms name;
+manuscript-reference: e.g. CAO reference;
+manuscript-storage-place: library/monastery;
+book: from which score taken;
+transcriber: writer of gabc;
+transcription-date: 2009;
+initial-style: 1;
+user-notes: whatever other comments you wish to make;
+mode: 6;
+annotation: IN.;
+annotation: 6;
+%%
+(clef) text(notes)
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+In each case, replace whatever is between the colon and semi-colon
+\texttt{(:...;)} with the appropriate character string. Of these attributes,
+only name is mandatory. Descriptions of how these header fields are
+intended to be used are below. If you wish to write a value over
+several lines, omit the semicolon at the end of the first line, and
+end the attribute value with \texttt{;;} (two semicolons).
+
+\subsection{Header}
+
+Here is a detailed description of each header field:
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[name] This is the name of the piece, in almost all cases the
+ incipit, the first few words. In the case of the mass ordinary, the
+ form as \texttt{Kyrie X Alme Pater} or \texttt{Sanctus XI} is
+ recommended where appropriate. \textbf{This field is required.}
+\item[mode] The mode of the piece. This should normally be an arabic
+ number between 1 and 8, but may be any text required for unusual
+ cases. The mode number will be converted to roman numerals and
+ placed above the initial unless one of the following conditions are
+ met:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item There is a \verb=\greannotation= defined immediatly prior to \verb=\gregorioscore=.
+ \item The \texttt{annotation} header field is defined.
+ \end{itemize}
+\item[annotation] The annotation is the text to appear above the
+ initial letter. Usually this is an abbreviation of the office-part
+ in the upper line, and an indication of the mode (and differentia
+ for antiphons) in the lower. Either one or two annotation fields may
+ be used; if two are used, the first is the upper line, the second
+ the lower. Example:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+ annotation:Ad Magnif.;
+ annotation:VIII G;
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ Full \TeX markup is accepted:
+ \begin{lstlisting}
+ annotation:{\color{red}Ad Magnif.};
+ annotation:{\color{red}VIII G};
+ \end{lstlisting}
+ If the user already defined annotation(s) in the main TeX file via
+ \verb=\greannotation= then the \texttt{annotation} header field will not
+ overwrite that definition.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Lyric Centering}
+
+Gregorio centers the text of each syllable around the first note of each
+syllable. There are two basic modes: \verb:\setlyriccentering{syllable}:
+and \verb:\setlyriccentering{vowel}:. In \texttt{syllable} mode, the
+entire syllable is centered around the first note. This is common in
+modern music. In \texttt{vowel} mode, the vowel sound of the syllable is
+centered around the first note. This is common in most Gregorian chant
+books with text in Latin.\bigskip
+
+The default rules built into Gregorio for \texttt{vowel} mode are for
+Ecclesiatical Latin and work fairly well (though not perfectly) for
+other languages (especially Romance languages). However, Gregorio
+provides a gabc \texttt{language} header which allows the language of
+the lyrics to be set. Gregorio will look for a file named
+\texttt{gregorio-vowels.dat} in your working directory or amongst the
+GregorioTeX files. If it finds the requested language (matched in a
+\emph{case-sensitive} fashion) in one of these files (henceforth called
+vowel files), Gregorio will use the rules contained within for vowel
+centering. If it cannot find the requested language in any of the vowel
+files or is unable to parse the rules, Gregorio will fall back on the
+Latin rules. If multiple vowel files have the desired language,
+Gregorio will use the first matching language section in the first
+matching file, according to Kpathsea order. You may wish to enable
+verbose output (by passing the \texttt{-v} argument to
+\texttt{gregorio}), if there is a problem, for more information.\bigskip
+
+The vowel file is a list of statements, each starting with a keyword and
+ending with a semicolon (\texttt{;}). Multiple statements with the same
+keyword are allowed, and all will apply. Comments start with a hash
+symbol (\texttt{\#}) and end at the end of the line.\bigskip
+
+In general, Gregorio does no case folding, so the keywords and language
+names are case-sensitive and both upper- and lower-case characters
+should be listed after the keywords if they should both be considered in
+their given categories.\bigskip
+
+The keywords are:
+
+\begin{description}
+
+\item[alias]
+
+The \texttt{alias} keyword indicates that a given name is an alias for a
+given language. The \texttt{alias} keyword must be followed by the name
+of the alias (enclosed in square brackets), the \texttt{to} keyword, the
+name of the target language (enclosed in square brackets), and a
+semicolon. Since gregorio reads the vowel files sequentially, aliases
+should precede the language they are aliasing, for best performance.
+
+\item[language]
+
+The \texttt{language} keyword indicates that the rules which follow are
+for the specified language. It must be followed by the language name,
+enclosed in square brackets, and a semicolon. The language specified
+applies until the next language statement.
+
+\item[vowel]
+
+The \texttt{vowel} keyword indicates that the characters which follow,
+until the next semicolon, should be considered vowels.
+
+\item[prefix]
+
+The \texttt{prefix} keyword lists strings of characters which end in a
+vowel, but when followed by a sequence of vowels, \emph{should not} be
+considered part of the vowel sound.  These strings follow the keyword
+and must be separated by space and end with a semicolon.  Examples of
+prefixes include \emph{i} and \emph{u} in Latin and \emph{qu} in
+English.
+
+\item[suffix]
+
+The \texttt{suffix} keyword lists strings of characters which don't
+start with a vowel, but when appearing after a sequence of vowels,
+\emph{should} be considered part of the vowel sound.  These strings
+follow the keyword and must be separated by space and end with a
+semicolon. Examples of suffixes include \emph{w} and \emph{we} in
+English and \emph{y} in Spanish.
+
+\item[secondary]
+
+The "secondary" keyword lists strings of characters which do not contain
+vowels, but for which, when there are no vowels present in a syllable,
+define the center of the syllable. These strings follow the keyword and
+must be separated by space and end with a semicolon. Examples of
+secondary sequences include \emph{w} from Welsh loanwords in English and
+the syllabic consonants \emph{l} and \emph{r} in Czech.
+
+\end{description}
+
+By way of example, here is a vowel file that works for English:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}
+alias [english] to [English];
+
+language [English];
+
+vowel aàáAÀÁ;
+vowel eèéëEÈÉË;
+vowel iìíIÌÍ;
+vowel oòóOÒÓ;
+vowel uùúUÙÚ;
+vowel yỳýYỲÝ;
+vowel æǽÆǼ;
+vowel œŒ;
+
+prefix qu Qu qU QU;
+prefix y Y;
+
+suffix w W;
+suffix we We wE WE;
+
+secondary w W;
+\end{lstlisting}
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioNabcRef-4_0_0-beta2.pdf b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioNabcRef-4_0_0-beta2.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..62b6eb82f03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioNabcRef-4_0_0-beta2.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioNabcRef.tex b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioNabcRef.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e040e4da6b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioNabcRef.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1249 @@
+% !TEX program = LuaLaTeX+se
+
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage{color}
+\usepackage{luacode}
+\usepackage[margin=1cm]{geometry}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{fixltx2e}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{color}
+\usepackage{gregoriotex}
+\usepackage{longtable}
+\usepackage{supertabular}
+\usepackage{carolmin}
+\setlength{\columnsep}{0.3cm} \setlength{\columnseprule}{1pt}
+\setmainfont{Linux Libertine O}
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{center}
+\huge{nabc language for gregorio}
+\end{center}
+
+ \vspace{1.5cm}
+ \begingroup%
+ \gredefbarredsymbol{Vbar}{V}{greVBar}{9.5}{0.05em}{0pt}%
+ \greannotation{\scriptsize{AL}}
+ \greannotation{\scriptsize{II}}
+ \color{black!60}
+ \setmainfont[SmallCapsFont=AlegreyaSC]{Alegreya}%
+ \addtolength{\hsize}{-4cm}%
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{5mm}%
+ \begin{list}{}{%
+ \setlength{\topsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.5cm}%
+ \setlength{\rightmargin}{1.5cm}%
+ \setlength{\listparindent}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\itemindent}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}%
+ }\item[]{\fbox{\parbox{\hsize}{\gregorioscore[f]{veni}}}}%
+ \end{list}%
+ \endgroup%
+
+\vfill
+\pagebreak
+
+\gresetnabcfont{gresgmodern}{8}
+\gresetnabcfont{gregall}{8}
+
+\def\neume#1{%
+ \begingroup %
+ \catcode`\~=12{}%
+ \catcode`\@=11{}%
+ \vbox{\hbox{\vspace{1mm}}\hbox{\noindent\GreNABCChar{#1}\hspace{1mm}}%
+ \hbox{\vspace{1mm}}\hbox{\noindent{\fontsize{6}{6}\texttt{#1}\hspace{1mm}}}}%
+ \endgroup %
+}
+
+\def\neumer#1{%
+ \begingroup %
+ \catcode`\~=12{}%
+ \catcode`\@=11{}%
+ \vbox{\hbox{\vspace{1mm}}\hbox{\noindent\hspace{8mm}\GreNABCChar{#1}\hspace{1mm}}%
+ \hbox{\vspace{1mm}}\hbox{\noindent{\fontsize{6}{6}\texttt{#1}\hspace{1mm}}}}%
+ \endgroup %
+}
+
+\def\sneume#1{%
+ \begingroup %
+ \catcode`\~=12{}%
+ \catcode`\@=11{}%
+ \font\grefontnabc={name:gregall} at 6pt\grefontnabc\begin{gre@style@nabc}%
+ \directlua{tex.sprint(gregoriotex.nabc_font_tables["gregall"]["\luatexluaescapestring{#1}"] or "")}%
+ \end{gre@style@nabc}%
+ \endgroup %
+}
+
+{
+\setlength\parindent{0cm}
+
+The \texttt{nabc} language provides the ability to describe some adiastematic neumes, for
+now just the St.\ Gallen style. The language is partially based on Dom
+Eugène Cardine's Table of neumatic signs, but for more complex neumes
+doesn't always match how the neumes are called; instead attempts to make it
+easier to compose complex neumes from basic glyphs. To describe
+adiastematic neumes in \texttt{gabc}, the header should contain
+\texttt{nabc-lines: 1;} line, like:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+nabc-lines: 1;
+(f3) AL(ef~|ta>)le(fg/hggf|peclhgpi)lú(ef~|ta>)ia.(f.|ta-) (,)
+(ii//|bv-|gh!ivHG//|vi-hhppu2su1sut1|fhg/|to|eef.|pt) (;)
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \texttt{nabc} snippets are then separated by \texttt{|} character from
+\texttt{gabc} snippets or other \texttt{nabc} snippets. Every \texttt{gabc}
+snippet may be followed by multiple \texttt{nabc} snippets. The maximum
+number of consecutive \texttt{nabc} snippets is the number declared in the
+header field \texttt{nabc-lines: x;}. After reaching that number of
+consecutive \texttt{nabc} snippets another \texttt{gabc} snippet followed
+by \texttt{nabc} snippets can follow. A single \texttt{nabc} snippet is not
+split into multiple lines, so for larger melismatic pieces it is desirable
+to synchronize the \texttt{gabc} snippets with corresponding \texttt{nabc}
+snippets. With \texttt{nabc-lines: 1;} the
+\texttt{gabc} and \texttt{nabc} snippets form an alternating pattern, like
+\texttt{(gabc|nabc|gabc|nabc|gabc)}, in this case the last \texttt{gabc}
+snippet does not have any corresponding \texttt{nabc} neumes. With
+\texttt{nabc-lines: 2;} the snippets ordering could be
+e.g.\ \texttt{(gabc|nabc1|nabc2|gabc|nabc1)}.
+
+Each \texttt{nabc} snippet consists of a sequence of \textit{complex neume
+descriptors}. Each \textit{complex neume descriptor} consists of
+optional \textit{horizontal spacing adjustment descriptor}, then \textit{complex glyph
+descriptor}, optionally followed by a sequence of \textit{subpunctis and prepunctis
+descriptor}s, optionally followed by a sequence of \textit{significant letter
+descriptor}s.
+
+The \textit{horizontal spacing adjustment descriptor}
+consists of a sequence of horizontal spacing adjustment characters
+\texttt{/} and \texttt{`}.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{//} move by \texttt{nabclargerspace} skip to the right
+ \item \texttt{/} move by \texttt{nabcinterelementspace} skip to the right
+ \item \texttt{``} move by \texttt{nabclargerspace} skip to the left
+ \item \texttt{`} move by \texttt{nabcinterelementspace} skip to the left
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \textit{complex glyph descriptor} consists of a \textit{glyph descriptor},
+optionally followed by a sequence of other \textit{glyph descriptor}s, all
+separated by the \texttt{!} character. This is used to describe more
+complex glyphs, where certain basic glyphs are connected together.
+
+Each \textit{glyph descriptor} consists of a \textit{basic glyph descriptor},
+followed by optional \textit{glyph modifiers}, followed by optional
+\textit{pitch descriptor}.
+
+The \textit{basic glyph descriptor} is a two-letter string from the
+following table:
+\begin{multicols}{5}
+\texttt{vi} \sneume{vi} virga\\
+\texttt{pu} \sneume{pu} punctum\\
+\texttt{ta} \sneume{ta} tractulus\\
+\texttt{gr} \sneume{gr} gravis\\
+\texttt{cl} \sneume{cl} clivis\\
+\texttt{pe} \sneume{pe} pes\\
+\texttt{po} \sneume{po} porrectus\\
+\texttt{to} \sneume{to} torculus\\
+\texttt{ci} \sneume{ci} climacus\\
+\texttt{sc} \sneume{sc} scandicus\\
+\texttt{pf} \sneume{pf} porrectus flexus\\
+\texttt{sf} \sneume{sf} scandicus flexus\\
+\texttt{tr} \sneume{tr} torculus resupinus\\
+\texttt{st} \sneume{st} stropha\\
+\texttt{ds} \sneume{ds} distropha\\
+\texttt{ts} \sneume{ts} tristropha\\
+\texttt{tg} \sneume{tg} trigonus\\
+\texttt{bv} \sneume{bv} bivirga\\
+\texttt{tv} \sneume{tv} trivirga\\
+\texttt{pr} \sneume{pr} pressus maior\\
+\texttt{pi} \sneume{pi} pressus minor\\
+\texttt{vs} \sneume{vs} virga strata\\
+\texttt{or} \sneume{or} oriscus\\
+\texttt{sa} \sneume{sa} scandicus\\
+\texttt{pq} \sneume{pq} pes quassus\\
+\texttt{ql} \sneume{ql} quilisma (3 loops)\\
+\texttt{qi} \sneume{qi} quilisma (2 loops)\\
+\texttt{pt} \sneume{pt} pes stratus
+\end{multicols}
+
+The \texttt{glyph modifiers} is a possibly empty sequence of following
+characters optionally followed by a number:
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{S} modification of the mark
+ \item \texttt{G} modification of the grouping (neumatic break)
+ \item \texttt{M} melodic modification
+ \item \texttt{-} addition of episema
+ \item \texttt{>} augmentive liquescence
+ \item ~~\texttt{\~} diminutive liquescence
+\end{itemize}
+If Dom Cardine's table contains multiple glyphs with the same modifiers,
+a positive number is added afterwards. E.g.\ for augmentive liquescent
+clivis the table shows two different glyphs, the ancus \texttt{cl>} \sneume{cl>}
+and then another neume - \texttt{cl>1} \sneume{cl>1}, the first neume does
+not contain any number after it, while the \texttt{1} indicates first
+variant.
+
+The \textit{pitch descriptor} allows to specify the vertical position of the
+neume. There are no staves, so the vertical position is only rough. For
+pitches the same letters as in \texttt{gabc} are used, \texttt{a} through
+\texttt{m}. If the \textit{pitch descriptor} is missing, the default is
+\texttt{hf}, otherwise it consists of the letter \texttt{h} followed by
+the pitch letter. Within the \textit{complex glyph descriptor}, each
+\textit{basic glyph descriptor} has its own pitch, but in the current fonts
+there are no glyphs with different relative pitches, so if you use a
+\textit{pitch descriptor} on any of the \textit{basic glyph descriptor}s
+in the \textit{complex glyph descriptor}, it is best to use the same one on all
+the other \textit{basic glyph descriptor}s in the same \textit{complex glyph descriptor}.
+
+The \textit{subpunctis and prepunctis descriptor} consists of the letters
+\texttt{su} for subpunctis or \texttt{pp} for prepunctis, followed
+optionally by a modifier letter from the following table and finally a mandatory
+positive number of repetitions. If the modifier letter is missing, it is a
+punctum.
+\begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{t} \sneume{ta} tractulus
+ \item \texttt{u} \sneume{ta-} tractulus with episema
+ \item \texttt{v} \sneume{suv1} tractulus with double episema
+ \item \texttt{w} \sneume{gr} gravis
+ \item \texttt{x} \sneume{st>} liquescens stropha
+ \item \texttt{y} \sneume{gr-} gravis with episema
+\end{itemize}
+Only subpunctis are normally used in neume classification, the prepunctis is
+a \texttt{nabc} concept to describe the rising sequence of punctis, tractulis
+etc.\ in the left low corner of some neume. While e.g.\ \texttt{vipp2}
+\sneume{sc} describes the same neume as \texttt{sc} \sneume{sc}, the
+former form allows better control on how many punctis or tractulis or
+tractulis with episema etc.\ there are. Some examples:
+\texttt{ppt3} \sneume{ppt3} stands for 3 raising tractulis with episema,
+while \texttt{su1sut1sux1} \sneume{su1sut1sux1} stands for a punctum,
+followed by tractulus, followed by liquescens stropha.
+
+The \textit{significant letter descriptor} consists of the letters
+\texttt{ls}, followed by a shorthand of the significant letter or common
+group of them, followed by a number - a rough position relative to the
+\textit{complex glyph descriptor} glyph with prepunctis and subpunctis
+attached to it. If more than one \textit{significant letter descriptor}
+is used on the same \textit{complex neume descriptors} for the same
+position, then they are ordered in the order they are written in the
+\texttt{nabc} snippet at that position. The position numbers are:
+
+
+\makebox[6cm][l]{\texttt{1} \GreNABCChar{vilsc1} left upper corner}
+\makebox[6cm][l]{\texttt{2} \GreNABCChar{vilsc2} above the neume}
+\makebox[6cm][l]{\texttt{3} \GreNABCChar{vilsc3} right upper corner}\\
+\makebox[6cm][l]{\texttt{4} \GreNABCChar{vilsc4} to the left of the neume}
+\makebox[6cm][l]{}
+\makebox[6cm][l]{\texttt{6} \GreNABCChar{vilsc6} to the right of the neume}\\
+\makebox[6cm][l]{\texttt{7} \GreNABCChar{vilsc7} left bottom corner}
+\makebox[6cm][l]{\texttt{8} \GreNABCChar{vilsc8} below the neume}
+\makebox[6cm][l]{\texttt{9} \GreNABCChar{vilsc9} right bottom corner}\\
+
+
+The shorthands, including the \texttt{ls} prefix, which should be followed
+by the above mentioned position digit:
+\begin{multicols}{3}
+\texttt{lsal} \sneume{lsal} altius\\
+\texttt{lsam} \sneume{lsam} altius mediocriter\\
+\texttt{lsb} \sneume{lsb} bene\\
+\texttt{lsc} \sneume{lsc} celeriter\\
+\texttt{lscm} \sneume{lscm} celeriter mediocriter\\
+\texttt{lsco} \sneume{lsco} coniunguntur\\
+\texttt{lscw} \sneume{lscw} celeriter (wide form)\\
+\texttt{lsd} \sneume{lsd} deprimatur\\
+\texttt{lse} \sneume{lse} equaliter\\
+\texttt{lseq} \sneume{lseq} equaliter\\
+\texttt{lsew} \sneume{lsew} equaliter (wide form)\\
+\texttt{lsfid} \sneume{lsfid} fideliter\\
+\texttt{lsfr} \sneume{lsfr} frendor\\
+\texttt{lsg} \sneume{lsg} gutture\\
+\texttt{lsi} \sneume{lsi} iusum\\
+\texttt{lsim} \sneume{lsim} iusum mediocriter\\
+\texttt{lsiv} \sneume{lsiv} iusum valde\\
+\texttt{lsk} \sneume{lsk} klenche\\
+\texttt{lsl} \sneume{lsl} levare\\
+\texttt{lslb} \sneume{lslb} levare bene\\
+\texttt{lslc} \sneume{lslc} levare celeriter\\
+\texttt{lslen} \sneume{lslen} leniter\\
+\texttt{lslm} \sneume{lslm} levare mediocriter\\
+\texttt{lslp} \sneume{lslp} levare parvum\\
+\texttt{lslt} \sneume{lslt} levare tenere\\
+\texttt{lsm} \sneume{lsm} mediocriter\\
+\texttt{lsmoll} \sneume{lsmoll} molliter\\
+\texttt{lsp} \sneume{lsp} parvum\\
+\texttt{lspar} \sneume{lspar} paratim\\
+\texttt{lspfec} \sneume{lspfec} perfecte\\
+\texttt{lspm} \sneume{lspm} parvum mediocriter\\
+\texttt{lss} \sneume{lss} sursum\\
+\texttt{lssb} \sneume{lssb} sursum bene\\
+\texttt{lssc} \sneume{lssc} sursum celeriter\\
+\texttt{lssimil} \sneume{lssimil} similiter\\
+\texttt{lssimul} \sneume{lssimul} simul\\
+\texttt{lssm} \sneume{lssm} sursum mediocriter\\
+\texttt{lsst} \sneume{lsst} sursum tenere\\
+\texttt{lssta} \sneume{lssta} statim\\
+\texttt{lst} \sneume{lst} tenere\\
+\texttt{lstb} \sneume{lstb} tenere bene\\
+\texttt{lstm} \sneume{lstm} tenere mediocriter\\
+\texttt{lstw} \sneume{lstw} tenere (wide form)\\
+\texttt{lsv} \sneume{lsv} valde\\
+\texttt{lsvol} \sneume{lsvol} volubiliter\\
+\texttt{lsx} \sneume{lsx} expectare
+\end{multicols}
+
+Finally a commented example of a \texttt{nabc} snippet:
+
+\texttt{```po////pe>2lse7lsl3qlhh!vshhppt1sut2ql>ppu3}
+
+\GreNABCChar{```po////pe>2lse7lsl3qlhh!vshhppt1sut2ql>ppu3}
+
+\texttt{```} stands for a negative horizontal skip (move to the left)
+by \texttt{nabcinterelementspace} and \texttt{nabclargerspace}.
+
+\texttt{po} \sneume{po} is a basic porrectus, at the default pitch
+(height \texttt{hf}).
+
+\texttt{////} stands for a horizontal skip (move to the right) by
+two times \texttt{nabclargerspace}.
+
+\texttt{pe>2lse7lsl3} \GreNABCChar{pe>2lse7lsl3} stands for the
+3rd augmentive liquescent form of podatus (epiphonus with tractulus, see the
+following page) at the default pitch, with equaliter in the low left corner
+and levare in the upper right corner.
+
+\texttt{qlhh!vshhppt1sut2} \GreNABCChar{qlhh!vshhppt1sut2} stands for
+a 3 loop quilisma joined with virga strata, both at relative pitch 2 above
+the default one, with a single tractulus before it and two subpunctis -
+tractulis.
+
+\texttt{ql>ppu3} \GreNABCChar{ql>ppu3} is a 3 loop liquescent quilisma
+with 3 tractulis with episema before it.
+}
+
+\vfill
+\pagebreak
+
+{
+\noindent\footnotesize
+\begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|l|l|l|l|l|l|}
+\hline
+Names of & Simple & \multicolumn{4}{c|}{Symbols differentiated by} & \multicolumn{3}{c|}{Symbols indicating} \\
+Symbols & Symbols & \multicolumn{4}{c|}{} & \multicolumn{3}{c|}{a special meaning} \\ \hline
+& & \multicolumn{2}{c|}{the addition} & \multicolumn{2}{c|}{the modification} & melodic & \multicolumn{2}{c|}{phonetic} \\ \cline{3-9}
+& & of letters & of episemas & of the mark & of the grouping & & \multicolumn{2}{c|}{liquescence} \\ \cline{8-9}
+& & & & & (neumatic break) & & augment.\ & dimi \\
+& & & & & & & & nut.\ \\ \cline{3-6}\cline{8-9}
+virga & \neume{vi} & \neume{vilsc3}\neume{vilst1}\neume{vippt1lsc2} & \neume{vi-} & & & & \neume{vi>} & \\
+tractulus & \neume{ta} & \neume{talsc3}\neume{talst2} & & & & & \neume{ta>} & \\
+punctum & \neume{pu} & & & & & & \neume{st}\neume{visu1sux1} & \\
+gravis & \neume{gr} & & & & & & & \\
+clivis & \neume{cl} & \neume{cllsc3}\neume{cllst2}\neume{cl-lst2} & \neume{cl-}\neume{clS-} & \neume{clS}\neume{clS1} & & \neume{clM} & \neume{cl>}\neume{cl>1} & \neume{cl~} \\
+pes & \neume{pe} & & \neume{pe-}\neume{pe-1} & \neume{peS} & \neume{peG} & \neume{peG} & \neume{pe>}\neume{pe>1}\neume{pe>2} & \neume{pe~} \\
+porrectus & \neume{po} & \neume{polsc2} & \neume{po-}\neume{po-1} & & \neume{poG} & & \neume{po>} & \neume{po~} \\
+torculus & \neume{to} & \neume{tolsc3}\neume{tolsc4lst3}\neume{tolst2} & \neume{to-}\neume{to-1} & \neume{toS}\neume{toS1}\neume{toS2}\neume{toS3} & \neume{toG} & \neume{toM}\neume{toM1} & \neume{to>} & \neume{pe>} \\
+climacus & \neume{ci}\neume{ci1} & \neume{cilsc3}\neume{cilst2} & \neume{ci-} & \neume{ciS}\neume{ciS1}\neume{visut1su2} & \neume{ciG}\neume{ciG1} & \neume{ciM} & \neume{ci>} & \neume{ci~} \\
+scandicus & \neume{sc} & & \neume{sc-} & \neume{scS} & \neume{scG}\neume{scG1} & \multicolumn{1}{r|}{\neume{scM1}} & \neume{sc>} & \neume{sc~} \\
+& \multicolumn{1}{r|}{\neume{sc1}} & & \multicolumn{1}{r|}{\neumer{vi-hevi-hivi-hm}} & & & \neume{vihevihivihm} & & \\
+\vbox{\hbox{porrectus}\hbox{flexus}} & \neume{pf} & \neume{pflsc2}\neume{pf1lsc2}\neume{pflst2} & \neume{pf-} & \neume{pfS} & \neume{sfM} & \neume{pfM} & \neume{pf>} & \neume{pf~} \\
+\vbox{\hbox{pes}\hbox{subbipunctis}} & \neume{pesu2} & \neume{vippt1su2lsc3} & \neume{pe-su2}\neume{pe-1su2} & \neume{peSsu2}\neume{peSsut2} & \neume{vippt1su2} & \neume{vi-!ci}\neume{pesu1suw1} & \neume{pesu1sux1} & \neume{to>} \\
+& & & \multicolumn{1}{r|}{\neume{pe-1sut2}} & & \multicolumn{1}{r|}{\neume{toS2sut1}} & & & \\
+\vbox{\hbox{scandicus}\hbox{flexus}} & \neume{sf} & \neume{sflsc3} & \neume{sf-} & \neume{sfS} & \neume{vi-tohk}\neume{peclhi} & \neume{sfM} & \neume{cl>ppt2} & \neume{sc>} \\
+\vbox{\hbox{torculus}\hbox{resuspinus}} & \neume{tr} & \neume{trlsc2}\neume{trlst2} & \multicolumn{1}{r|}{\neume{tr-1}} & \neume{trS} & \neume{trG}\neume{trG1}\neume{trG2} & \neume{trM} & \neume{tr>} & \neume{tr~} \\ \hline
+apostropha & \neume{st} & & \neume{st-} & \neume{stS} & & & \neume{st>} & \\
+distropha & \neume{ds} & \neume{ds-lsx6} & \neume{ds-} & & & & \neume{ds>} & \\
+tristropha & \neume{ts} & \neume{ts-lsx6} & \neume{ts-} & & & \neume{tsM} & \neume{ts>} & \\
+trigonus & \neume{tg}\neume{tg1} & & & \neume{tgS}\neume{tgS1}\neume{tgS3} & & \neume{tgM} & & \neume{ds>} \\
+\vbox{\hbox{bigirga \&}\hbox{trivirga}} & \neume{bv}\neume{tv} & & \neume{bv-}\neume{tv-} & & & & \neume{bv>} & \\ \hline
+pressus & \neume{pr}\neume{pi} & \neume{prlsc2}\neume{pr-lsc2}\neume{prlst2} & \neume{pr-} & & & \neume{prM} & \neume{pr>}\neume{pi>} & \neume{vs>} \\
+& & \neume{pilsc2}\neume{pilst2} & & & & & & \neume{or>} \\
+\vbox{\hbox{virga}\hbox{strata}} & \neume{vs} & \neume{vslsc3}\neume{vslst2} & \neume{vs-} & & & & \neume{vs>} & \neume{ta>} \\
+oriscus & \neume{or} & & & & & & \neume{or>} & \\
+salicus & \neume{sa}\neume{sa1} & \neume{salsfr1}\neume{saM1lsfr1} & \neume{sa-}\neume{sa-1} & & \neume{saG} & \neume{saM}\neume{saM1}\neume{saM2} & \neume{sa>}\neume{sa->1} & \neume{pe>2} \\
+pes quassus & \neume{pq} & \neume{pqlsfr1} & \neume{pq-} & & & & \neume{pq>} & \\
+quilisma & \neume{ql}\neume{qi} & & \neume{ql-}\neume{qi-} & & & & \neume{ql>}\neume{qi>} & \\ \hline
+\vbox{\hbox{pes}\hbox{stratus}} & \neume{pt} & & & & & & & \\ \hline
+\end{tabular}
+}
+
+\begin{center}
+Table from Cardine's Gregorian Semiology, pp.\ 12-13 with nabc strings and gregall glyphs.
+\end{center}
+
+\vfill
+\pagebreak
+
+\begin{center}
+Table with nabc strings and corresponding gregall and gresgmodern glyphs:
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{luacode*}
+ local i
+ local last
+ local key
+ local str
+ local keym
+ local arr = {}
+ for key in pairs(gregoriotex.nabc_font_tables['gregall']) do
+ table.insert(arr, key)
+ end
+ for key in pairs(gregoriotex.nabc_font_tables['gresgmodern']) do
+ table.insert(arr, key)
+ end
+ table.sort(arr)
+ tex.sprint("\\begin{multicols}{3}\\noindent");
+ for i, key in ipairs(arr) do
+ if last ~= key then
+ last = key
+ keym = key:gsub("~","\\~{}")
+ str = keym .. "\\hfill"
+ if gregoriotex.nabc_font_tables['gregall'][key] then
+ str = str .. "{\\font\\grefontnabc={name:gregall} at 8pt\\grefontnabc\\begin{gre@style@nabc}" .. gregoriotex.nabc_font_tables['gregall'][key] .. "\\end{gre@style@nabc}}"
+ else
+ str = str .. "{\\color{blue}missing}"
+ end
+ str = str .. "\\hfill"
+ if gregoriotex.nabc_font_tables['gresgmodern'][key] then
+ str = str .. "{\\font\\grefontnabc={name:gresgmodern} at 8pt\\grefontnabc\\begin{gre@style@nabc}" .. gregoriotex.nabc_font_tables['gresgmodern'][key] .. "\\end{gre@style@nabc}}"
+ else
+ str = str .. "{\\color{blue}missing}"
+ end
+ tex.sprint(str .. "\\\\")
+ end
+ end
+ tex.sprint("\\end{multicols}")
+\end{luacode*}
+
+\vfill
+\pagebreak
+
+\begin{center}
+\huge{manuscript sources of the gregall font}
+\end{center}
+
+\textit{The list of glyphs uses following abbreviations for manuscript
+references; the page number is always for the start of some antiphon,
+responsory, mass propers, even when the actual neume is on a later page.
+At the end of lines, \texttt{GT} stands for Graduale Triplex, Solesmes,
+1979, \texttt{OT} for Offertoriale Triplex, Solesmes, 1985, \texttt{AM}
+for Antiphonale Monasticum, Solesmes, 1934, \texttt{ARII} for Antiphonale
+Romanum II, Solesmes, 2009 and \texttt{NR} for Nocturnale Romanum, Hartker
+Verlag, 2002, followed by page number which also contains the corresponding
+propers, antiphons or responsories.}
+
+\textit{Most of the glyphs taken from the e-codices Virtual Manuscript Library
+of Switzerland, \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en}, with permission
+from Stiftsbibliothek, St.\ Gallen \url{http://www.stibi.ch/} and
+Stiftsbibliothek, Einsiedeln\\
+\url{http://kloster-einsiedeln.ch/}, the picture fragments from there are
+only present in the font source file to help drawing the glyphs.}
+
+{\footnotesize
+
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+
+\noindent\textbf{Cantatorium codex 359}
+
+\noindent
+\texttt{C1} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0359_001/max}\\
+\texttt{C25U} Universi \texttt{GT16}\\
+\texttt{C26A} Alleluia Ostende \texttt{GT16}\\
+\texttt{C26D} Dilexisti iustitiam \texttt{GT499}\\
+\texttt{C27E} Ex Sion \texttt{GT18}\\
+\texttt{C27Q} Qui sedes \texttt{GT22}\\
+\texttt{C28A} Alleluia. Excita Domine \texttt{GT23}\\
+\texttt{C28T} Tollite portas \texttt{GT25}\\
+\texttt{C32B} Benedictus es in firmamento \texttt{GT664}\\
+\texttt{C35Q} Qui regis Israel intende\\
+\texttt{C37A} Alleluia. Veni, Domine \texttt{GT36}\\
+\texttt{C38T} Tecum principium \texttt{GT42}\\
+\texttt{C38A} Alleluia Dominus dixit \texttt{GT43}\\
+\texttt{C39B} Benedictus qui \texttt{GT45}\\
+\texttt{C40A} Alleluia Dies sanctificatus \texttt{GT49}\\
+\texttt{C40V} Viderunt omnes \texttt{GT48}\\
+\texttt{C42A} Alleluia. Hic est discipulus \texttt{GT636}\\
+\texttt{C43A} Anima nostra \texttt{GT453}\\
+\texttt{C43L} Laus tibi Christe\\
+\texttt{C44E} Ecce sacerdos \texttt{GT486}\\
+\texttt{C44D} Diffusa est gratia \texttt{GT408}\\
+\texttt{C45S} Speciosus forma \texttt{GT54}\\
+\texttt{C46O} Omnes de Saba \texttt{GT57}\\
+\texttt{C46B} Benedictus Dominus \texttt{GT257}\\
+\texttt{C46A} Alleluia Vidimus stellam \texttt{GT58}\\
+\texttt{C47I} Iuravit Dominus \texttt{GT486}\\
+\texttt{C49I} Inveni David \texttt{GT445}\\
+\texttt{C50G} Gloriosus Deus \texttt{GT456}\\
+\texttt{C52T} Timebunt gentes \texttt{GT265}\\
+\texttt{C52P} Posuisti Domine \texttt{GT477}\\
+\texttt{C53S} Suscepimus Deus \texttt{GT360}\\
+\texttt{C53A} Alleluia. Adorabo ad templum \texttt{GT270}\\
+\texttt{C54A} Audi filia \texttt{GT417}\\
+\texttt{C56B} Beatus vir \texttt{GT475}\\
+\texttt{C56D} Desiderium animae \texttt{GT432}\\
+\texttt{C58A} Adiutor \texttt{GT69}\\
+\texttt{C59D} De profundis \texttt{GT673}\\
+\texttt{C60S} Sciant gentes \texttt{GT88}\\
+\texttt{C60C} Commovisti Domine \texttt{GT89}\\
+\texttt{C61T} Tu es Deus \texttt{GT275}\\
+\texttt{C61I} Iubilate Domino \texttt{GT185}\\
+\texttt{C62M} Miserere mei \texttt{GT63}\\
+\texttt{C64Q} Qui habitat \texttt{GT73}\\
+\texttt{C67D} Dirigatur \texttt{GT340}\\
+\texttt{C71L} Laudate Dominum \texttt{GT187}\\
+\texttt{C73P} Propitius esto \texttt{GT288}\\
+\texttt{C74B} Bonum est \texttt{GT327}\\
+\texttt{C78O} Oculi omnium \texttt{GT343}\\
+\texttt{C79L} Leatatus sum \texttt{GT336}\\
+\texttt{C80Q} Qui confidunt \texttt{GT109}\\
+\texttt{C81E} Exsurge Domine \texttt{GT114}\\
+\texttt{C82B} Beata gens \texttt{GT333}\\
+\texttt{C82R} Respice Domine \texttt{GT320}\\
+\texttt{C82V} Venite filii \texttt{GT298}\\
+\texttt{C84T} Tibi Domine \texttt{GT118}\\
+\texttt{C87E} Exaltabo te \texttt{GT112}\\
+\texttt{C88T} Tollite hostias \texttt{GT272}\\
+\texttt{C89T} Tenuisti manum \texttt{GT133}\\
+\texttt{C95D} Domine exaudi \texttt{GT172}\\
+\texttt{C97D} Domine audivi\\
+\texttt{C100C} Crux fidelis \texttt{GT182}\\
+\texttt{C103C} Cantemus Domino \texttt{GT186}\\
+\texttt{C104V} Vinea facta \texttt{GT188}\\
+\texttt{C107A} Alleluia Pascha nostrum \texttt{GT197}\\
+\texttt{C118C} Clamaverunt iusti \texttt{GT454}\\
+\texttt{C122I} In omnem terram \texttt{GT427}\\
+\texttt{C123C} Constitues eos \texttt{GT426}\\
+\texttt{C134B} Benedicite Dominum \texttt{GT608}\\
+\texttt{C137A} Audi filia \texttt{GT406}\\
+\texttt{C139A} Alleluia Benedictus es \texttt{GT375}\\
+\texttt{C139B} Benedictus es \texttt{GT372}\\
+\texttt{C145L} Liberasti nos \texttt{GT366}\\
+\texttt{C148A} Alleluia Domine refugium \texttt{GT321}\\
+\texttt{C148Q} Alleluia Quoniam Deus \texttt{GT327}\\
+\texttt{C148V} Alleluia Venite \texttt{GT324}\\
+\texttt{C149A} Alleluia. Paratum cor meum \texttt{GT344}\\
+\texttt{C150L} Alleluia Laetatus \texttt{GT19}\\
+\texttt{C153S} Alleluia Sancti tui, Domine, benedicent \texttt{GT463}\\
+\texttt{C154A} Alleluia Gaudete iusti \texttt{GT430}
+
+\noindent\textbf{Einsiedeln codex 121}
+
+\noindent
+\texttt{E1} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/sbe-0121_001/max}\\
+\texttt{E2R} Respice in me \texttt{OT5}\\
+\texttt{E2D} Dominus dabit \texttt{GT17}\\
+\texttt{E3D} Deus tu convertens \texttt{GT20}\\
+\texttt{E10P} Prope est Dominus \texttt{GT35}\\
+\texttt{E11C} Confortamini \texttt{OT9}\\
+\texttt{E13P} Prope es tu \texttt{GT24}\\
+\texttt{E16B} Benedictus es\\
+\texttt{E20E} Exsulta satis \texttt{GT28}\\
+\texttt{E23T} Tollite portas \texttt{OT14}\\
+\texttt{E26L} Lux fulgebit \texttt{GT44}\\
+\texttt{E29E} Exsulta filia sion \texttt{GT47}\\
+\texttt{E31T} Tui sunt caeli \texttt{OT18}\\
+\texttt{E33V} Viderunt omnes \texttt{GT50}\\
+\texttt{E34I} In virtute tua \texttt{OT152}\\
+\texttt{E35E} Elegerunt apostoli \texttt{OT161}\\
+\texttt{E39E} Exiit sermo inter \texttt{GT636}\\
+\texttt{E42A} Anima nostra \texttt{GT466}\\
+\texttt{E51R} Reges tharsis \texttt{OT21}\\
+\texttt{E69P} Posuisti Domine \texttt{GT477}\\
+\texttt{E82D} De profundis \texttt{GT673}\\
+\texttt{E92I} Immutemur \texttt{GT65}\\
+\texttt{E104S} Sicut oculi \texttt{GT77}\\
+\texttt{E125P} Precatus est Moyses \texttt{GT317}\\
+\texttt{E130I} Illumina oculos \texttt{GT290}\\
+\texttt{E131O} Oculi mei semper \texttt{GT96}\\
+\texttt{E133I} Iustitiae Domini \texttt{GT309}\\
+\texttt{E147L} Laetare Ierusalem \texttt{GT108}\\
+\texttt{E148L} Laudate Dominum \texttt{GT110}\\
+\texttt{E155B} Benedicite gentes Domino \texttt{GT231}\\
+\texttt{E158D} Domine ad adiuvandum \texttt{OT42}\\
+\texttt{E161S} Sitientes venite \texttt{GT114}\\
+\texttt{E162F} Factus est Dominus \texttt{GT119}\\
+\texttt{E166C} Confitebor tibi Domine \texttt{OT44}\\
+\texttt{E173E} Eripe me \texttt{GT129}\\
+\texttt{E193D} Domine, exaudi orationem \texttt{OT53}\\
+\texttt{E195D} Dominus Iesus \texttt{GT165}\\
+\texttt{E205R} Resurrexi \texttt{GT196}\\
+\texttt{E248V} Viri Galilaei \texttt{GT235}\\
+\texttt{E255S} Spiritus Domini \texttt{GT252}\\
+\texttt{E256C} Confirma hoc \texttt{OT79}\\
+\texttt{E262S} Sapientiam sanctorum \texttt{GT452}\\
+\texttt{E272M} Mihi autem nimis \texttt{OT128}\\
+\texttt{E293V} Vindica Domine\\
+\texttt{E320I} Inclina aurem \texttt{GT300}\\
+\texttt{E327O} Oravi Deum meum \texttt{OT107}\\
+\texttt{E324R} Respice, Domine \texttt{GT320}\\
+\texttt{E336I} In voluntate tua \texttt{GT346}\\
+\texttt{E339S} Si iniquitates \texttt{GT350}\\
+\texttt{E373B} Benedictus es \texttt{GT372}
+
+\noindent\textbf{Hartker codex 390/391}
+
+\noindent
+\texttt{H1} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0390_001/max}\\
+\texttt{H195} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0391_001/max}\\
+\texttt{H16A} Aspiciebam in visu \texttt{NR111}\\
+\texttt{H16M} Missus est Gabriel \texttt{NR111}\\
+\texttt{H16V} Ave Maria \texttt{NR113}\\
+\texttt{H23E} Egredietur Dominus de Samaria \texttt{NR129}\\
+\texttt{H25E} Ecce mitto Angelum \texttt{AM201}\\
+\texttt{H26G} Grata facta est \texttt{NR25*}\\
+\texttt{H28Q} Qui venturus est \texttt{NR134}\\
+\texttt{H29E} Ecce radix Jesse \texttt{NR137}\\
+\texttt{H32N} Nascetur nobis \texttt{NR149}\\
+\texttt{H33I} Iuravi dicit Dominus \texttt{NR151}\\
+\texttt{H35G} Germinaverunt campi \texttt{NR144}\\
+\texttt{H36A} Adnuntiatum est\\
+\texttt{H48B} Beata et venerabilis\\
+\texttt{H50Q} Quem vidistis pastores \texttt{AM240}\\
+\texttt{H72V} Venit lumen tuum \texttt{AM290}\\
+\texttt{H72H} Hodie in Iordane \texttt{NR229}\\
+\texttt{H73O} Omnes de Saba \texttt{NR237}\\
+\texttt{H73S} Stella ista \texttt{NR242}\\
+\texttt{H74I} Illuminare, illuminare \texttt{NR236}\\
+\texttt{H75I} In columbae specie \texttt{NR231}\\
+\texttt{H75V} Videntes stellam \texttt{NR242}\\
+\texttt{H77S} Stella ista \texttt{AM291}\\
+\texttt{H77A} Ab Oriente \texttt{AM297}\\
+\texttt{H87E} Exaudi Deus\\
+\texttt{H103S} Spes nostra salus \texttt{NR512}\\
+\texttt{H103M} Magnus Dominus \texttt{NR516}\\
+\texttt{H104T} Te Deum patrem\\
+\texttt{H112S} Stans a dextris \texttt{AM798}\\
+\texttt{H118G} Gaude, Maria Virgo \texttt{NR130*}\\
+\texttt{H119C} Cum inducerent\\
+\texttt{H179L} Liberavit Dominus \texttt{ARII183}\\
+\texttt{H179A} Amicus meus osculi \texttt{NR381}\\
+\texttt{H179I} Iudas mercator \texttt{NR382}\\
+\texttt{H266D} Domino si in tempore\\
+\texttt{H269S} Spiritus Sanctus\\
+\texttt{H269D} Dum complerentur \texttt{NR493}\\
+\texttt{H269R} Repleti sunt omnes \texttt{NR494}\\
+\texttt{H270S} Spiritus Domini \texttt{AM520}\\
+\texttt{H271L} Loquebantur variis \texttt{AM521}\\
+\texttt{H367V} Viri sancti \texttt{NR[54]}\\
+\texttt{H424M} Magnificat\\
+\texttt{H428A} Ascendens Iesus \texttt{AM593}
+
+\noindent\textbf{St.\ Gall codex 339}
+
+\noindent
+\texttt{G1} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0339_033/max}\\
+\texttt{G56} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0339_088/max}\\
+\texttt{G57} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0339_088a/max}\\
+\texttt{G58} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0339_089/max}\\
+\texttt{G8E} Exulta satis \texttt{OT11}\\
+\texttt{G9A} Alleluia Veni Domine \texttt{GT36}\\
+\texttt{G11P} Puer natus est \texttt{GT47}\\
+\texttt{G11V} Viderunt omnes \texttt{GT48}\\
+\texttt{G12T} Tui sunt caeli \texttt{OT18}\\
+\texttt{G20I} Iubilate Deo universa terra \texttt{GT227}\\
+\texttt{G22D} Domine quinque talenta \texttt{GT515}\\
+\texttt{G25P} Posuisti Domine \texttt{GT477}\\
+\texttt{G30E} Exsurge quare obdormis \texttt{GT91}\\
+\texttt{G35D} Domine vivifica me \texttt{OT31}\\
+\texttt{G42D} Domine Deus salutis \texttt{OT112}\\
+\texttt{G44P} Precatus est Moyses \texttt{GT317}\\
+\texttt{G45D} Domine in auxilium \texttt{OT106}\\
+\texttt{G51I} Intende voci \texttt{GT280}\\
+\texttt{G51S} Si ambulabem \texttt{GT125}\\
+\texttt{G57F} Factus est Dominus \texttt{GT119}\\
+\texttt{G89D} Domine Deus in simplicitate \texttt{OT159}\\
+\texttt{G113A} Alleluia. Dilexit Andream \texttt{GT625}\\
+\texttt{G116C} Cantabo Domino \texttt{GT283}\\
+\texttt{G126D} Alleluia. Domine Deus meus \texttt{GT282}\\
+\texttt{G128A} Alleluia. Attendite popule\\
+\texttt{G132A} Alleluia. Mirabilis Dominus \texttt{GT462}\\
+\texttt{G132V} Alleluia. Vox exultationis\\
+\texttt{G139A} Asperges me Domine\\
+\texttt{G140O} Oremus dilectissimi nobis\\
+\texttt{G141O} Omnipotens Deus
+
+\noindent\textbf{St.\ Gall codex 376}
+
+\noindent
+\texttt{N1} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0376_001/max}\\
+\texttt{N39H} Hodie cantandus est nobis\\
+\texttt{N53A} Audite fratres dilecti\\
+\texttt{N59N} Nativitatem venerandam\\
+\texttt{N65G} Gloriatis laus tua Deus\\
+\texttt{N67G} Gloria in excelsis Deo\\
+\texttt{N68G} Gloria in excelsis Deo\\
+\texttt{N69G} Gloria in excelsis Deo\\
+\texttt{N73G} Kyrie eleison\\
+\texttt{N86D} Dilexisti iustitiam \texttt{GT498}\\
+\texttt{N100T} Tui sunt caeli \texttt{OT18}\\
+\texttt{N171D} Deus exaudi orationem \texttt{GT107}\\
+\texttt{N221N} Alleluia. Non vos relinquam \texttt{GT242}\\
+\texttt{N270A} Alleluia. Benedictus es \texttt{GT375}\\
+\texttt{N293A} Alleluia. Sancti tui, Domine, benedicent \texttt{GT463}\\
+\texttt{N296V} Alleluia. Veni Sancte Spiritus \texttt{GT263}\\
+\texttt{N363C} Carmen suo dilecto\\
+\texttt{N368L} Letamente canamus Domino nostro\\
+\texttt{N372O} O quam mira sunt Deus
+
+\noindent\textbf{St.\ Gall codex 374}
+
+\noindent
+\texttt{A1} = \url{http://www.e-codices.unifr.ch/en/download/csg-0374_001/max}\\
+\texttt{A17T} Tui sunt caeli \texttt{OT18}\\
+\texttt{A22V} Vox in Rama \texttt{GT638}\\
+\texttt{A26F} Fili quid fecisti \texttt{GT51}\\
+\texttt{A56C} Custodi me Domine \texttt{GT304}\\
+\texttt{A127E} Exultabunt sancti \texttt{OT143}\\
+\texttt{A167O} Oravi Deum meum \texttt{OT107}\\
+\texttt{A174A} Alleluia. Eripe me \texttt{GT308}
+
+\noindent
+\textbf{Bamberg, lit.\ 6, Gradual of St.\ Emmeram}
+
+\noindent
+\texttt{B9v} = \url{http://bsbsbb.bsb.lrz-muenchen.de/~db/0000/sbb00000128/images/index.html?id=00000128no=19&seite=22&signatur=Msc.Lit.6}\\
+\texttt{B9vA} Anima nostra \texttt{GT466}
+
+\end{multicols}
+}
+
+{
+\footnotesize
+\twocolumn
+\begin{supertabular}{lllll}\noindent
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{virga}} & \\
+\sneume{vi} & \texttt{vi} & \texttt{C78O} & tu\\
+\sneume{vilsc3} & \texttt{vilsc3} & \texttt{C82R} & testamentum\\
+\sneume{vilst1} & \texttt{vilst1} & \texttt{E29E} & rex & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{vi-} & \texttt{vi-} & \texttt{C80Q} & montes\\
+\sneume{vi>} & \texttt{vi>} & \texttt{C27E} & eius\\
+\sneume{vi-lst3} & \texttt{vi-lst3} & \texttt{H50Q} & Quem\\
+\sneume{vi->} & \texttt{vi->} & \texttt{E20E} & sanctus & \fbox{2.166x}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{tractulus}} & \\
+\sneume{ta} & \texttt{ta} & \texttt{C26A} & Domine\\
+\sneume{talsc3} & \texttt{talsc3} & \texttt{E262S} & saeculum & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{talst2} & \texttt{talst2} & \texttt{C56D} & Desiderium\\
+\sneume{ta-} & \texttt{ta-} & \texttt{C81E} & antiquis.\\
+\sneume{ta>} & \texttt{ta>} & \texttt{C25U} & et\\
+\sneume{suv1} & \texttt{suv1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pesu2suv1} & \texttt{pesu2suv1}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{punctum}} & \\
+\sneume{pu} & \texttt{pu} & \texttt{C137A} & Audi\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{st} & \texttt{st}\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{ci>} & \texttt{ci>}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{gravis}} & \\
+\sneume{gr} & \texttt{gr} & \texttt{H271L} & Loquebantur\\
+\sneume{gr-} & \texttt{gr-} & \texttt{H270S} & Spiritus\\
+\sneume{gr-lsc6} & \texttt{gr-lsc6} & \texttt{H270S} & replevit\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{clivis}} & \\
+\sneume{cl} & \texttt{cl} & \texttt{C78O} & sperant\\
+\sneume{cllsc3} & \texttt{cllsc3} & \texttt{C26A} & nobis\\
+\sneume{cllst2} & \texttt{cllst2} & \texttt{C25U} & exspectant\\
+\sneume{cl-lst2} & \texttt{cl-lst2} & \texttt{C52P} & pretioso.\\
+\sneume{cl-} & \texttt{cl-} & \texttt{C78O} & omnium\\
+\sneume{clS-} & \texttt{clS-} & \texttt{C81E} & opem\\
+\sneume{clS} & \texttt{clS} & \texttt{C78O} & opportuno.\\
+\sneume{clS1} & \texttt{clS1} & \texttt{H424M} & potentiam\\
+\sneume{clM} & \texttt{clM} & \texttt{C148V} & nostro\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{cl>} & \texttt{cl>}\\
+\sneume{cl>1} & \texttt{cl>1} & \texttt{H36A} & virginis\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi>} & \texttt{vi>}\\
+\sneume{cl->1} & \texttt{cl->1} & \texttt{H50Q} & natum\\
+\sneume{cl->} & \texttt{cl->} & \texttt{H50Q} & angelorum\\
+\sneume{clM-} & \texttt{clM-} & \texttt{C27Q} & super\\
+\sneume{clS-1} & \texttt{clS-1} & \texttt{H428A} & navem\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{pes}} & \\
+\sneume{pe} & \texttt{pe} & \texttt{C80Q} & Domine\\
+\sneume{pe-} & \texttt{pe-} & \texttt{C80Q} & aeternum\\
+\sneume{pe-1} & \texttt{pe-1} & \texttt{C64Q} & Scapulis\\
+\sneume{peS} & \texttt{peS} & \texttt{C78O} & in\\
+\sneume{peG} & \texttt{peG} & \texttt{B9vA} & erepta & \fbox{0.5x}\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{peG} & \texttt{peG}\\
+\sneume{pe>} & \texttt{pe>} & \texttt{C100C} & germine\\
+\sneume{pe>1} & \texttt{pe>1} & \texttt{C27E} & eius\\
+\sneume{pe>2} & \texttt{pe>2} & \texttt{C71L} & misericordia\\
+\sneume{pe->} & \texttt{pe->} & \texttt{N296V} & tuorum\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{ta>} & \texttt{ta>}\\
+\sneume{pe->1} & \texttt{pe->1} & \texttt{H35G} & Germinaverunt & \fbox{1.7x}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{porrectus}} & \\
+\sneume{po} & \texttt{po} & \texttt{C139B} & super\\
+\sneume{polsc2} & \texttt{polsc2} & \texttt{C82R} & iudica\\
+\sneume{po-} & \texttt{po-} & \texttt{G20I} & anime & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{po-1} & \texttt{po-1} & \texttt{C26A} & tuum\\
+\sneume{poG} & \texttt{poG} & \texttt{C40V} & salutare\\
+\sneume{po>} & \texttt{po>} & \texttt{C80Q} & commovebitur\\
+\sneume{po~} & \texttt{po~} & \texttt{C58A} & aeternum\\
+\sneume{poG-} & \texttt{poG-} & \texttt{A167O} & meum\\
+\sneume{posu2} & \texttt{posu2} & \texttt{C46O} & gloria\\
+\sneume{po-1su2} & \texttt{po-1su2} & \texttt{H269R} & alleluia\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{torculus}} & \\
+\sneume{to} & \texttt{to} & \texttt{C78O} & Domine\\
+\sneume{tolsc3} & \texttt{tolsc3} & \texttt{C39B} & nomine\\
+\sneume{tolsc4lst3} & \texttt{tolsc4lst3} & \texttt{E125P} & Domine, & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{tolst2} & \texttt{tolst2} & \texttt{C74B} & misericordiam\\
+\sneume{to-} & \texttt{to-} & \texttt{G44P} & animae\\
+\sneume{to-1} & \texttt{to-1} & \texttt{C139A} & nostrorum\\
+\sneume{toS} & \texttt{toS} & \texttt{C38A} & hodie\\
+\sneume{toS1} & \texttt{toS1} & \texttt{E205R} & Resurrexi, & \fbox{0.5x}\\
+\sneume{toS2} & \texttt{toS2} & \texttt{E161S} & Sitientes & \fbox{1.75x}\\
+\sneume{toS3} & \texttt{toS3} & \texttt{C104V} & circumfodit\\
+\sneume{toG} & \texttt{toG} & \texttt{G12T} & eius\\
+\sneume{toM} & \texttt{toM} & \texttt{C49I} & servum\\
+\sneume{toM1} & \texttt{toM1} & \texttt{C39B} & mirabile\\
+\sneume{to>} & \texttt{to>} & \texttt{C26A} & misericordiam\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{pe>} & \texttt{pe>}\\
+\sneume{toS3lst2} & \texttt{toS3lst2} & \texttt{C59D} & tuae\\
+\sneume{pq!cl-} & \texttt{pq!cl-} & \texttt{C87E} & sanasti\\
+\sneume{to>1} & \texttt{to>1} & \texttt{E130I} & obdormiam & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{to->} & \texttt{to->} & \texttt{E158D} & respexit & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{toS2sux1} & \texttt{toS2sux1} & \texttt{C46O} & Surge\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{climacus}} & \\
+\sneume{ci} & \texttt{ci} & \texttt{C26A} & tuum\\
+\sneume{ci1} & \texttt{ci1} & \texttt{G73P} & gentes\\
+\sneume{cilsc3} & \texttt{cilsc3} & \texttt{C74B} & tuo\\
+\sneume{ci-} & \texttt{ci-} & \texttt{C81E} & nos\\
+\sneume{ciS} & \texttt{ciS} & \texttt{C81E} & Domine\\
+\sneume{ciS1} & \texttt{ciS1} & \texttt{C139A} & Deus\\
+\sneume{visut1su2} & \texttt{visut1su2} & \texttt{C53A} & Adorabo\\
+\sneume{ciG} & \texttt{ciG} & \texttt{C64Q} & lapidem\\
+\sneume{ciG1} & \texttt{ciG1} & \texttt{C42A} & ille\\
+\sneume{ciM} & \texttt{ciM} & \texttt{C154A} & Alleluia\\
+\sneume{ci>} & \texttt{ci>} & \texttt{C46O} & orta\\
+\sneume{cl>} & \texttt{cl>} & \texttt{C79L} & domum\\
+\sneume{visuv1su2} & \texttt{visuv1su2} & \texttt{C35Q} & nos\\
+\sneume{visut3} & \texttt{visut3} & \texttt{C38T} & meo\\
+\sneume{visu1suu1} & \texttt{visu1suu1} & \texttt{C26D} & laetitia.\\
+\sneume{visut4} & \texttt{visut4} & \texttt{C25U} & me.\\
+\sneume{cl-1su2} & \texttt{cl-1su2} & \texttt{C40A} & magna\\
+\sneume{visu1sut2} & \texttt{visu1sut2} & \texttt{C43L} & Domine\\
+\sneume{visu1suv1} & \texttt{visu1suv1} & \texttt{C53S} & terrae.\\
+\sneume{visuu1su2} & \texttt{visuu1su2} & \texttt{C56D} & eius\\
+\sneume{visuu2su2} & \texttt{visuu2su2} & \texttt{H103S} & salus\\
+\sneume{vi-suu2su2} & \texttt{vi-suu2su2} & \texttt{H103S} & o\\
+\sneume{visu2suw1} & \texttt{visu2suw1} & \texttt{G113A} & Alleluia & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{visut2su2} & \texttt{visut2su2} & \texttt{G128A} & Alleluia & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{visut3suw1} & \texttt{visut3suw1} & \texttt{C153S} & dicent.\\
+\sneume{visu1sut1sux1} & \texttt{visu1sut1sux1} & \texttt{G126D} & salvum & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{visu1sut1su2} & \texttt{visu1sut1su2} & \texttt{N39H} & puer\\
+\sneume{visu1sut1su1sut1} & \texttt{visu1sut1su1sut1} & \texttt{N39H} & generavit\\
+\sneume{vi-su1sut1su2} & \texttt{vi-su1sut1su2} & \texttt{N39H} & enim\\
+\sneume{visut1sux1} & \texttt{visut1sux1} & \texttt{N59N} & filium\\
+\sneume{clSsu1sut1} & \texttt{clSsu1sut1} & \texttt{N65G} & tui\\
+\sneume{vi-su4} & \texttt{vi-su4} & \texttt{N68G} & Amen.\\
+\sneume{vi-su1sut2su1} & \texttt{vi-su1sut2su1} & \texttt{N73K} & Christe\\
+\sneume{visu1sut1suy1} & \texttt{visu1sut1suy1} & \texttt{N221N} & Alleluia.\\
+\sneume{visut3suy1} & \texttt{visut3suy1} & \texttt{N293A} & dicent.\\
+\sneume{visut2suy1} & \texttt{visut2suy1} & \texttt{N363C} & sacro & \fbox{1.25x}\\
+\sneume{visu5} & \texttt{visu5} & \texttt{N368L} & fornacibus & \fbox{1.25x}\\
+\sneume{visu1suu1su2} & \texttt{visu1suu1su2} & \texttt{N372O} & erogatione & \fbox{1.25x}\\
+\sneume{vi-su1suu2} & \texttt{vi-su1suu2} & \texttt{A174A} & meus\\
+\sneume{vi-su1suu1su1} & \texttt{vi-su1suu1su1} & \texttt{A174A} & Alleluia.\\
+\sneume{vi-sut2} & \texttt{vi-sut2} & \texttt{H74I} & illuminare\\
+\sneume{clS-su2} & \texttt{clS-su2} & \texttt{C46A} & eius\\
+\sneume{vi-suu1su2} & \texttt{vi-suu1su2} & \texttt{H75I} & sanctus\\
+\sneume{clSsut2} & \texttt{clSsut2} & \texttt{E51R} & suscipiant & \fbox{2.0x}\\
+\sneume{vi-sut3} & \texttt{vi-sut3} & \texttt{H269D} & dicentes\\
+\sneume{vi-su1sut1} & \texttt{vi-su1sut1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-su1sut1su2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{vi-su1sut1su2} minus subpunctis}\\
+\sneume{vi-su2sut1} & \texttt{vi-su2sut1} & \texttt{N296V} & alleluia\\
+\sneume{vi-su1sux1} & \texttt{vi-su1sux1} & \texttt{E373B} & Sanctum & \fbox{2.133x}\\
+\sneume{vi-sut4} & \texttt{vi-sut4} & \texttt{H16A} & servient & \fbox{1.7x}\\
+\sneume{vi-suu2} & \texttt{vi-suu2} & \texttt{H23E} & ecce & \fbox{1.7x}\\
+\sneume{vi-suu3} & \texttt{vi-suu3} & \texttt{H35G} & veniet & \fbox{1.7x}\\
+\sneume{visu2sux1} & \texttt{visu2sux1} & \texttt{H48B} & mater & \fbox{1.7x}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{scandicus}} & \\
+\sneume{sc} & \texttt{sc} & \texttt{G11P} & imperium & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{sc1} & \texttt{sc1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vipp4} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{vipp4} minus first punctum}\\
+\sneume{sc-} & \texttt{sc-} & \texttt{C123C} & terram\\
+\sneume{scS} & \texttt{scS} & \texttt{C154A} & Alleluia\\
+\sneume{scG} & \texttt{scG} & \texttt{H179I} & Iudas\\
+\sneume{scG1} & \texttt{scG1} & \texttt{C52P} & Posuisti\\
+\sneume{scM1} & \texttt{scM1} & \texttt{C67D} & Domine\\
+\sneume{sc>} & \texttt{sc>} & \texttt{C26A} & Alleluia\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{pe>2} & \texttt{pe>2}\\
+\sneume{vi-pp2} & \texttt{vi-pp2} & \texttt{C26A} & Domine\\
+\sneume{vi-ppt3} & \texttt{vi-ppt3} & \texttt{C27E} & veniet.\\
+\sneume{scM2} & \texttt{scM2} & \texttt{C44E} & Ecce\\
+\sneume{vi>ppt3} & \texttt{vi>ppt3} & \texttt{E2R} & non & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{cl>ppt2} & \texttt{cl>ppt2} & \texttt{H73O} & annuntiantes\\
+\sneume{vi-!vi!vi} & \texttt{vi-!vi!vi} & \texttt{E155B} & Benedicite & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{vippt3} & \texttt{vippt3} & \texttt{G140O} & ae & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{vi-pp4} & \texttt{vi-pp4} & \texttt{C154A} & rectos\\
+\sneume{vi-!vi-!vi} & \texttt{vi-!vi-!vi} & \texttt{H118G} & erubescat\\
+\sneume{vipp4} & \texttt{vipp4} & \texttt{A127E} & eum\\
+\sneume{vi>ppt2} & \texttt{vi>ppt2} & \texttt{H75V} & apertis\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{porrectus flexus}} & \\
+\sneume{pf} & \texttt{pf} & \texttt{C27E} & sacrificia\\
+\sneume{pflsc2} & \texttt{pflsc2} & \texttt{C58D} & intendentes\\
+\sneume{pf1lsc2} & \texttt{pf1lsc2} & \texttt{C61I} & Ipse\\
+\sneume{pflst2} & \texttt{pflst2} & \texttt{C122I} & fines\\
+\sneume{pf-} & \texttt{pf-} & \texttt{C81E} & antiquis.\\
+\sneume{pfS} & \texttt{pfS} & \texttt{G116C} & tribuit & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{sfM} & \texttt{sfM} & \texttt{E248V} & alleluia, & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{pfM} & \texttt{pfM} & \texttt{E39E} & manere & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{pf>} & \texttt{pf>} & \texttt{C95D} & manducare\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{po>} & \texttt{po>}\\
+\sneume{pfMsut1} & \texttt{pfMsut1} & \texttt{E34I} & eum & \fbox{2.166x}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{pes subbipunctis}} & \\
+\sneume{pesu2} & \texttt{pesu2} & \texttt{C81E} & antiquis.\\
+\sneume{vippt1su2lsc3} & \texttt{vippt1su2lsc3} & \texttt{C61T} & solus:\\
+\sneume{pe-su2} & \texttt{pe-su2} & \texttt{H73S} & adoraverunt\\
+\sneume{pe-1su2} & \texttt{pe-1su2} & \texttt{C64Q} & habitat\\
+\sneume{pe-1sut2} & \texttt{pe-1sut2} & \texttt{H104T} & confitemur\\
+\sneume{peSsu2} & \texttt{peSsu2} & \texttt{A17T} & eius\\
+\sneume{peSsut2} & \texttt{peSsut2} & \texttt{C27E} & sanctos\\
+\sneume{vippt1su2} & \texttt{vippt1su2} & \texttt{C56B} & benedicetur.\\
+\sneume{toS2sut1} & \texttt{toS2sut1} & \texttt{C139A} & Alleluia\\
+\sneume{vi-!ci} & \texttt{vi-!ci} & \texttt{E272M} & cognovisti & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{pesu1suw1} & \texttt{pesu1suw1} & \texttt{G8E} & plebem\\
+\sneume{pe-su1sut1} & \texttt{pe-su1sut1} & \texttt{N296V} & alleluia\\
+\sneume{pe-su2suy1} & \texttt{pe-su2suy1} & \texttt{N296V} & alleluia\\
+\sneume{pe-1sut3} & \texttt{pe-1sut3} & \texttt{H179A} & malum\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{to>} & \texttt{to>}\\
+\sneume{pesu1suu1} & \texttt{pesu1suu1} & \texttt{C27E} & Deus\\
+\sneume{pesu3} & \texttt{pesu3} & \texttt{C27Q} & regis\\
+\sneume{vippt1su1sut1} & \texttt{vippt1su1sut1} & \texttt{C40V} & omnes\\
+\sneume{vippu1su2} & \texttt{vippu1su2} & \texttt{C74B} & Altissime.\\
+\sneume{pesu1sut3} & \texttt{pesu1sut3} & \texttt{C60S} & venti.\\
+\sneume{pesu2suv1} & \texttt{pesu2suv1} & \texttt{C60C} & Sana\\
+\sneume{vippu1su2lsc3} & \texttt{vippu1su2lsc3} & \texttt{C32B} & caeli\\
+\sneume{pe-1su1suu1} & \texttt{pe-1su1suu1} & \texttt{C61I} & pascuae\\
+\sneume{peSsu1sux1} & \texttt{peSsu1sux1} & \texttt{G89D} & filii & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{pe-su3sut1} & \texttt{pe-su3sut1} & \texttt{N270A} & saecula.\\
+\sneume{pe-1sut1sux1} & \texttt{pe-1sut1sux1} & \texttt{H72V} & orta\\
+\sneume{peSsut3} & \texttt{peSsut3} & \texttt{C46O} & Jerusalem\\
+\sneume{pesut2} & \texttt{pesut2} & \texttt{H77S} & magi\\
+\sneume{pe-1suw2} & \texttt{pe-1suw2} & \texttt{E255S} & Domini & \fbox{2.133x}\\
+\sneume{peSsut1su2} & \texttt{peSsut1su2} & \texttt{E13P} & Domine & \fbox{2.133x}\\
+\sneume{pesu1sux1} & \texttt{pesu1sux1} & \texttt{H25E} & angelum & \fbox{1.7x}\\
+\sneume{pe-1su1suw1} & \texttt{pe-1su1suw1} & \texttt{H29E} & deprecabuntur & \fbox{1.7x}\\
+\sneume{pesu1sut1} & \texttt{pesu1sut1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pesu1sut3} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{pesu1sut3} minus 2 tractulis}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{scandicus flexus}} & \\
+\sneume{sf} & \texttt{sf} & \texttt{C64Q} & habitat\\
+\sneume{sflsc3} & \texttt{sflsc3} & \texttt{C27E} & Deus\\
+\sneume{sf-} & \texttt{sf-} & \texttt{C39B} & est\\
+\sneume{sfS} & \texttt{sfS} & \texttt{C97D} & Deus\\
+\sneume{toppu1} & \texttt{toppu1} & \texttt{C103C} & Cantemus\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{sfM} & \texttt{sfM}\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{sc>} & \texttt{sc>}\\
+\sneume{to>pp2} & \texttt{to>pp2} & \texttt{E324R} & testamentum & \fbox{2.0x}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{torculus resupinus}} & \\
+\sneume{tr} & \texttt{tr} & \texttt{C25U} & edoce\\
+\sneume{trlst2} & \texttt{trlst2} & \texttt{E69P} & eius & \fbox{2.0x}\\
+\sneume{tr-1} & \texttt{tr-1} & \texttt{C38T} & meo\\
+\sneume{trS} & \texttt{trS} & \texttt{C58A} & Domine\\
+\sneume{trG} & \texttt{trG} & \texttt{E336I} & fecisti & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{trG1} & \texttt{trG1} & \texttt{G25P} & ei\\
+\sneume{trG2} & \texttt{trG2} & \texttt{E147L} & Laetare & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{trM} & \texttt{trM} & \texttt{E336I} & resistere & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{tr>} & \texttt{tr>} & \texttt{C82V} & nonconfundentur\\
+\sneume{tr~} & \texttt{tr~} & \texttt{C60S} & Altissimus\\
+\sneume{tr-~} & \texttt{tr-~} & \texttt{C27Q} & et\\
+\sneume{tr-~1} & \texttt{tr-~1} & \texttt{C107A} & Alleluia.\\
+\sneume{trS-} & \texttt{trS-} & \texttt{C89T} & pedes,\\
+\sneume{trS1} & \texttt{trS1} & \texttt{E26L} & eeiieiue & \fbox{2.166x}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{stropha}} & \\
+\sneume{st} & \texttt{st} & \texttt{C80Q} & commovebitur\\
+\sneume{st-} & \texttt{st-} & \texttt{C52P} & Desiderium\\
+\sneume{stS} & \texttt{stS} & \texttt{E263V} & est. & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{st>} & \texttt{st>} & \texttt{C49I} & servum\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{distropha}} & \\
+\sneume{ds} & \texttt{ds} & \texttt{C46O} & super\\
+\sneume{dslsx6} & \texttt{dslsx6} & \texttt{C45S} & forma\\
+\sneume{ds-} & \texttt{ds-} & \texttt{C81E} & Domine\\
+\sneume{ds>} & \texttt{ds>} & \texttt{C38A} & Alleluia\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{tristropha}} & \\
+\sneume{ts} & \texttt{ts} & \texttt{C80Q} & Dominus\\
+\sneume{tslsx6} & \texttt{tslsx6} & \texttt{C44D} & mansuetudinem\\
+\sneume{ts-} & \texttt{ts-} & \texttt{C150L} & ibimus\\
+\sneume{tsM} & \texttt{tsM} & \texttt{C62M} & anima\\
+\sneume{ts>} & \texttt{ts>} & \texttt{C62M} & conculcantes\\
+\sneume{tsM-} & \texttt{tsM-} & \texttt{A26F} & ego\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{trigonus}} & \\
+\sneume{tg} & \texttt{tg} & \texttt{C80Q} & aeternum\\
+\sneume{tg1} & \texttt{tg1} & \texttt{C81E} & antiquis.\\
+\sneume{tgS} & \texttt{tgS} & \texttt{C139B} & omnibus\\
+\sneume{tgS1} & \texttt{tgS1} & \texttt{N171D} & mei\\
+\sneume{tgS3} & \texttt{tgS3} & \texttt{C61I} & laetitia.\\
+\sneume{tgM} & \texttt{tgM} & \texttt{C118C} & Dominus\\
+\sneume{tgS-} & \texttt{tgS-} & \texttt{C118C} & Dominus\\
+\sneume{tgS4} & \texttt{tgS4} & \texttt{C86D} & mei\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{bivirga}} & \\
+\sneume{bv} & \texttt{bv} & \texttt{C26D} & Propterea\\
+\sneume{bv-} & \texttt{bv-} & \texttt{C82B} & populus\\
+\sneume{bv>} & \texttt{bv>} & \texttt{H33I} & montes\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{trivirga}} & \\
+\sneume{tv} & \texttt{tv} & \texttt{C56D} & pretioso\\
+\sneume{tv-} & \texttt{tv-} & \texttt{C61I} & eius.\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{pressus}} & \\
+\sneume{pr} & \texttt{pr} & \texttt{C26A} & Alleluia\\
+\sneume{pi} & \texttt{pi} & \texttt{C82R} & Domine,\\
+\sneume{prlsc2} & \texttt{prlsc2} & \texttt{E339S} & Si & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{pr-lsc3} & \texttt{pr-lsc3} & \texttt{C122I} & Dei\\
+\sneume{prlst2} & \texttt{prlst2} & \texttt{C145L} & tuo\\
+\sneume{pilsc2} & \texttt{pilsc2} & \texttt{C122I} & Dei\\
+\sneume{pilst2} & \texttt{pilst2} & \texttt{C26A} & Alleluia\\
+\sneume{pr-} & \texttt{pr-} & \texttt{C59D} & Si\\
+\sneume{prM} & \texttt{prM} & \texttt{E173E} & insurgentibus & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{pr>} & \texttt{pr>} & \texttt{H72H} & in\\
+\sneume{pi>} & \texttt{pi>} & \texttt{H103M} & Magnus\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{vs>} & \texttt{vs>}\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{or>} & \texttt{or>}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{virga strata}} & \\
+\sneume{vs} & \texttt{vs} & \texttt{C148A} & generatio\\
+\sneume{vslsc3} & \texttt{vslsc3} & \texttt{C39B} & nomine\\
+\sneume{vslst2} & \texttt{vslst2} & \texttt{E195D} & suis, & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{vs-} & \texttt{vs-} & \texttt{C82B} & Domini\\
+\sneume{vs>} & \texttt{vs>} & \texttt{C64Q} & pennis\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{ta>} & \texttt{ta>}\\
+\sneume{vs->} & \texttt{vs->} & \texttt{A22V} & Rama\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{oriscus}} & \\
+\sneume{or} & \texttt{or} & \texttt{H112S} & candidior\\
+\sneume{or>} & \texttt{or>} & \texttt{C148V} & salutari\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{salicus}} & \\
+\sneume{sa} & \texttt{sa} & \texttt{C27E} & super\\
+\sneume{sa1} & \texttt{sa1} & \texttt{C148A} & Alleluia.\\
+\sneume{salsfr1} & \texttt{salsfr1} & \texttt{E3D} & Deus & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{sa-} & \texttt{sa-} & \texttt{C25U} & tuas\\
+\sneume{sa-1} & \texttt{sa-1} & \texttt{G30E} & tribulationis\\
+\sneume{saG} & \texttt{saG} & \texttt{C107A} & Alleluia.\\
+\sneume{saM} & \texttt{saM} & \texttt{H16V} & venient & \fbox{1.7x}\\
+\sneume{saM1} & \texttt{saM1} & \texttt{E10P} & omnis & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{saM2} & \texttt{saM2} & \texttt{C27Q} & regis\\
+\sneume{sa>} & \texttt{sa>} & \texttt{C27E} & sanctos\\
+\sneume{sa->1} & \texttt{sa->1} & \texttt{H77A} & magi\\
+\textit{Cf.} \sneume{pe>2} & \texttt{pe>2}\\
+\sneume{sa!clS1} & \texttt{sa!clS1} & \texttt{C80Q} & sicut\\
+\sneume{sa!clS-1} & \texttt{sa!clS-1} & \texttt{C27Q} & tuam\\
+\sneume{sa!clS1lsc2} & \texttt{sa!clS1lsc2} & \texttt{C46B} & Deus\\
+\sneume{sa-lsfr1} & \texttt{sa-lsfr1} & \texttt{C134B} & nomen\\
+\sneume{sa1!cl>} & \texttt{sa1!cl>} & \texttt{G45D} & respexit & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{sa!cl>} & \texttt{sa!cl>} & \texttt{G22D} & euge & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{sa!cl} & \texttt{sa!cl} & \texttt{G141O} & fortitudo & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{saM-1} & \texttt{saM-1} & \texttt{G139A} & Domine & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{sa!cl-} & \texttt{sa!cl-} & \texttt{G132V} & Alleluia. & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{saM3} & \texttt{saM3} & \texttt{N53A} & fratres\\
+\sneume{saM-4} & \texttt{saM-4} & \texttt{N296V} & amoris\\
+\sneume{sa>2} & \texttt{sa>2} & \texttt{H73S} & viderunt\\
+\sneume{sa1!cl->} & \texttt{sa1!cl->} & \texttt{H32N} & eius & \fbox{1.7x}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{pes quassus}} & \\
+\sneume{pq} & \texttt{pq} & \texttt{C27E} & sacrificia.\\
+\sneume{pqlsfr1} & \texttt{pqlsfr1} & \texttt{C150L} & nostri\\
+\sneume{pq-} & \texttt{pq-} & \texttt{C148V} & nostro\\
+\sneume{pq>} & \texttt{pq>} & \texttt{C84T} & pupillo\\
+\sneume{pqS} & \texttt{pqS} & \texttt{C52T} & maiestate\\
+\sneume{pqS>} & \texttt{pqS>} & \texttt{H424M} & potentiam\\
+\sneume{pq!cl>} & \texttt{pq!cl>} & \texttt{G57F} & firmamentum & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{pq!cl} & \texttt{pq!cl} & \texttt{E23T} & Domini & \fbox{2.166x}\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{quilisma}} & \\
+\sneume{ql} & \texttt{ql} & \texttt{C80Q} & commovebitur\\
+\sneume{qi} & \texttt{qi} & \texttt{C103C} & Hic\\
+\sneume{ql-} & \texttt{ql-} & \texttt{C148A} & generatio\\
+\sneume{qi-} & \texttt{qi-} & \texttt{H28Q} & veniet.\\
+\sneume{ql>} & \texttt{ql>} & \texttt{C40V} & gentium\\
+\sneume{qi>} & \texttt{qi>} & \texttt{C28A} & et\\ \hline
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{pes stratus}} & \\
+\sneume{pt} & \texttt{pt} & \texttt{G140O} & ae & \fbox{0.85x}\\ \hline
+\\
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{subpunctis}} & \\
+\sneume{su2} & \texttt{su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ci} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{ci}}\\
+\sneume{su3} & \texttt{su3} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ci1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{ci1}}\\
+\sneume{su1sut1} & \texttt{su1sut1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ciS} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{ciS}}\\
+\sneume{sut2} & \texttt{sut2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ciS1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{ciS1}}\\
+\sneume{suu1su2} & \texttt{suu1su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visuu1su2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visuu1su2}}\\
+\sneume{su1suw1} & \texttt{su1suw1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ciM} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{ciM}}\\
+\sneume{su1sux1} & \texttt{su1sux1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ci>} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{ci>}}\\
+\sneume{su1sut2} & \texttt{su1sut2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu1sut2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu1sut2}}\\
+\sneume{su1suu1} & \texttt{su1suu1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu1suu1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu1suu1}}\\
+\sneume{su2suw1} & \texttt{su2suw1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu2suw1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu2suw1}}\\
+\sneume{sut1su2} & \texttt{sut1su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visut1su2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visut1su2}}\\
+\sneume{sut3} & \texttt{sut3} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visut3} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visut3}}\\
+\sneume{suv1su2} & \texttt{suv1su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visuv1su2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visuv1su2}}\\
+\sneume{sut4} & \texttt{sut4} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visut4} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visut4}}\\
+\sneume{su1suv1} & \texttt{su1suv1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu1suv1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu1suv1}}\\
+\sneume{suu2su2} & \texttt{suu2su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-suu2su2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{vi-suu2su2}}\\
+\sneume{sut2su2} & \texttt{sut2su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visut2su2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visut2su2}}\\
+\sneume{su1sut3} & \texttt{su1sut3} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pesu1sut3} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{pesu1sut3}}\\
+\sneume{su2suv1} & \texttt{su2suv1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pesu2suv1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{pesu2suv1}}\\
+\sneume{sut3suw1} & \texttt{sut3suw1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visut3suw1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visut3suw1}}\\
+\sneume{su1sut1sux1} & \texttt{su1sut1sux1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu1sut1sux1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu1sut1sux1}}\\
+\sneume{su1sut1su2} & \texttt{su1sut1su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu1sut1su2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu1sut1su2}}\\
+\sneume{su1sut1su1sut1} & \texttt{su1sut1su1sut1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu1sut1su1sut1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu1sut1su1sut1}}\\
+\sneume{sut1sux1} & \texttt{sut1sux1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visut1sux1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visut1sux1}}\\
+\sneume{su4} & \texttt{su4} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-su4} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{vi-su4}}\\
+\sneume{su1sut2su1} & \texttt{su1sut2su1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-su1sut2su1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{vi-su1sut2su1}}\\
+\sneume{su1sut1suy1} & \texttt{su1sut1suy1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu1sut1suy1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu1sut1suy1}}\\
+\sneume{sut3suy1} & \texttt{sut3suy1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visut3suy1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visut3suy1}}\\
+\sneume{sut2suy1} & \texttt{sut2suy1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visut2suy1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visut2suy1}}\\
+\sneume{su5} & \texttt{su5} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu5} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu5}}\\
+\sneume{su1suu1su2} & \texttt{su1suu1su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{visu1suu1su2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{visu1suu1su2}}\\
+\sneume{su1suu2} & \texttt{su1suu2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-su1suu2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{vi-su1suu2}}\\
+\sneume{su1suu1su1} & \texttt{su1suu1su1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-su1suu1su1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{vi-su1suu1su1}}\\
+\sneume{su3sut1} & \texttt{su3sut1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pe-su3sut1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{pe-su3sut1}}\\
+\sneume{suu2} & \texttt{suu2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql-ppt1suu2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{ql-ppt1suu2}}\\
+\sneume{su2sut1} & \texttt{su2sut1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-su2sut1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{vi-su2sut1}}\\
+\sneume{su2suy1} & \texttt{su2suy1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pe-su2suy1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{pe-su2suy1}}\\
+\sneume{suw2} & \texttt{suw2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pe-1suw2} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{pe-1suw2}}\\
+\sneume{sut2suu1} & \texttt{sut2suu1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql-ppt1sut2suu1} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{ql-ppt1sut2suu1}}\\
+\sneume{suu3} & \texttt{suu3} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-suu3} & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\texttt{vi-suu3}}\\ \hline
+\\
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{prepunctis}} & \\
+\sneume{pp2} & \texttt{pp2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi-pp2} & \texttt{vi-pp2}\\
+\sneume{ppu2} & \texttt{ppu2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{scS} & \texttt{scS}\\
+\sneume{ppt2} & \texttt{ppt2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{sfS} & \texttt{sfS}\\
+\sneume{ppu3} & \texttt{ppu3} & \texttt{C47I} & Sede\\
+\sneume{ppu4} & \texttt{ppu4} & \texttt{C58A} & Domine\\
+\sneume{ppu5} & \texttt{ppu5} & \texttt{C50G} & confregit\\
+\sneume{pp4} & \texttt{pp4} & \texttt{C78O} & escam\\
+\sneume{pp3} & \texttt{pp3} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pp4} & \texttt{pp4}\\
+\sneume{ppt3} & \texttt{ppt3} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{vi>ppt3} & \texttt{vi>ppt3}\\
+\sneume{ppt4} & \texttt{ppt4} & \texttt{N69G} & amin.\\
+\sneume{ppt5} & \texttt{ppt5} & \texttt{A56C} & videant\\ \hline
+\\
+& \multicolumn{3}{l}{\textbf{combined glyphs}} & \\
+\sneume{cl!pi} & \texttt{cl!pi} & \texttt{C82R} & Domine\\
+\sneume{cl!pilsc1lst3} & \texttt{cl!pilsc1lst3} & \texttt{C89T} & manum\\
+\sneume{cl!pilsc2} & \texttt{cl!pilsc2} & \texttt{C149A} & cantabo\\
+\sneume{cl!pr} & \texttt{cl!pr} & \texttt{G51S} & ipsa & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{cl-!pi} & \texttt{cl-!pi} & \texttt{E35E} & illis & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{ql!cl} & \texttt{ql!cl} & \texttt{C148A} & Domine\\
+\sneume{ql!cl!cl>} & \texttt{ql!cl!cl>} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql!cl!cl>ppt1} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql!cl!cl>ppt1} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql!cl!pi} & \texttt{ql!cl!pi} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql!cl!pippt1} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql!cl!pippt1} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql!pf-} & \texttt{ql!pf-} & \texttt{G42D} & mane & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{ql!pf} & \texttt{ql!pf} & \texttt{G35D} & Domine\\
+\sneume{ql!cl-} & \texttt{ql!cl-} & \texttt{C26A} & Alleluia\\
+\sneume{ql!clM} & \texttt{ql!clM} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql!clMppt1} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql!clMppt1} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql!cl->} & \texttt{ql!cl->} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql!cl->ppt1} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql!cl->ppt1} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql!cl>} & \texttt{ql!cl>} & \texttt{H26L} & salva & \fbox{0.5x}\\
+\sneume{ql!po} & \texttt{ql!po} & \texttt{C148V} & nostro\\
+\sneume{ql!po-1} & \texttt{ql!po-1} & \texttt{C148A} & Alleluia.\\
+\sneume{ql!po>} & \texttt{ql!po>} & \texttt{H33I} & terram\\
+\sneume{ql!vs} & \texttt{ql!vs} & \texttt{C148A} & refugium\\
+\sneume{ql!vssu2} & \texttt{ql!vssu2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql!vsppt1su2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql!vsppt1su2} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql!vssut2} & \texttt{ql!vssut2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql!vsppt1sut2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql!vsppt1sut2} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{qi!vs} & \texttt{qi!vs} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{qi!vssu2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{qi!vssu2} minus subbipunctis}\\
+\sneume{qi!vssu2} & \texttt{qi!vssu2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{qi!vsppt1su2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{qi!vsppt1su2} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql-su2} & \texttt{ql-su2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql-ppt1su2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql-ppt1su2} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql-sut2} & \texttt{ql-sut2} & \texttt{H73S} & cedebat\\
+\sneume{ql-su1sux1} & \texttt{ql-su1sux1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql-ppt1su1sux1} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql-ppt1su1sux1} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql-su1sut2} & \texttt{ql-su1sut2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql-ppt1su1sut2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql-ppt1su1sut2} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql-sut1sux1} & \texttt{ql-sut1sux1} & \texttt{H72H} & complacui\\
+\sneume{ql-suu2} & \texttt{ql-suu2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql-ppt1suu2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql-ppt1suu2} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql-sut2suu1} & \texttt{ql-sut2suu1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql-ppt1sut2suu1} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql-ppt1sut2suu1} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{qi-su2} & \texttt{qi-su2} & \texttt{H73S} & cedebat\\
+\sneume{qi-su1sut2} & \texttt{qi-su1sut2} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{qi-ppt1su1sut2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{qi-ppt1su1sut2} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{qi-su1sux1} & \texttt{qi-su1sux1} & \texttt{H26G} & certamine & \fbox{1.7x}\\
+\sneume{qi!cl} & \texttt{qi!cl} & \texttt{C82B} & spiritu\\
+\sneume{qi!cl-} & \texttt{qi!cl-} & \texttt{C148A} & factus\\
+\sneume{qi!cl>} & \texttt{qi!cl>} & \texttt{H77S} & Magi\\
+\sneume{qi!po} & \texttt{qi!po} & \texttt{H87E} & Deus\\
+\sneume{pf!clM-ppt1} & \texttt{pf!clM-ppt1} & \texttt{E327O} & narante & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{cl!po>ppt1} & \texttt{cl!po>ppt1} & \texttt{E327O} & narante & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{qlppt1} & \texttt{qlppt1} & \texttt{C38T} & Sede\\
+\sneume{qippt1} & \texttt{qippt1} & \texttt{C37A} & Domine\\
+\sneume{qi!clppt1} & \texttt{qi!clppt1} & \texttt{C88T} & hostias,\\
+\sneume{ql-ppt1} & \texttt{ql-ppt1} & \texttt{C26D} & laetitiae.\\
+\sneume{ql>ppt1} & \texttt{ql>ppt1} & \texttt{C38T} & virtutis\\
+\sneume{qi>ppt1} & \texttt{qi>ppt1} & \texttt{C60S} & terram.\\
+\sneume{qisut1sux1} & \texttt{qisut1sux1} & \texttt{H269S} & linguarum\\
+\sneume{qlsut2} & \texttt{qlsut2} & \texttt{H269D} & alleluia\\
+\sneume{qi-sut2} & \texttt{qi-sut2} & \texttt{H269D} & alleluia\\
+\sneume{qi-ppt1su1sut2} & \texttt{qi-ppt1su1sut2} & \texttt{H269R} & magnalia\\
+\sneume{ql!cl>ppt1} & \texttt{ql!cl>ppt1} & \texttt{H73O} & aurum\\
+\sneume{ql!clppt1} & \texttt{ql!clppt1} & \texttt{C39B} & Domini:\\
+\sneume{ql!cl!cl>ppt1} & \texttt{ql!cl!cl>ppt1} & \texttt{E133I} & corda & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{ql!cl!pippt1} & \texttt{ql!cl!pippt1} & \texttt{E31T} & maris & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{ql!cl-ppt1} & \texttt{ql!cl-ppt1} & \texttt{C40A} & terram.\\
+\sneume{ql!clMppt1} & \texttt{ql!clMppt1} & \texttt{E324R} & tuum & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{ql!cl->ppt1} & \texttt{ql!cl->ppt1} & \texttt{G132A} & Alleluia. & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{ql!poppt1} & \texttt{ql!poppt1} & \texttt{C59D} & Domine.\\
+\sneume{ql!po-1ppt1} & \texttt{ql!po-1ppt1} & \texttt{C58A} & homo.\\
+\sneume{ql!po~ppt1} & \texttt{ql!po~ppt1} & \texttt{H179L} & pauperem\\
+\sneume{ql!po~} & \texttt{ql!po~} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql!po~} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql!po~} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{ql-ppt1su2} & \texttt{ql-ppt1su2} & \texttt{H72V} & Jerusalem\\
+\sneume{ql-ppt1su1sux1} & \texttt{ql-ppt1su1sux1} & \texttt{H73O} & Reges\\
+\sneume{ql-ppt1su1sut2} & \texttt{ql-ppt1su1sut2} & \texttt{H75I} & patris\\
+\sneume{ql-ppt1suu2} & \texttt{ql-ppt1suu2} & \texttt{H72H} & Hic\\
+\sneume{ql-ppt1sut2suu1} & \texttt{ql-ppt1sut2suu1} & \texttt{H16M} & altissimi & \fbox{1.7x}\\
+\sneume{ql!vsppt1su2} & \texttt{ql!vsppt1su2} & \texttt{H73O} & Domino\\
+\sneume{ql!vsppt1} & \texttt{ql!vsppt1} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{ql!vsppt1su2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{ql!vsppt1su2} minus subbipunctis}\\
+\sneume{ql!vsppt1sut2} & \texttt{ql!vsppt1sut2} & \texttt{H73S} & gaudio\\
+\sneume{qi!vsppt1su2} & \texttt{qi!vsppt1su2} & \texttt{H74I} & Domini\\
+\sneume{to!ciG} & \texttt{to!ciG} & \texttt{C28T} & gloriae.\\
+\sneume{to!cl} & \texttt{to!cl} & \texttt{C84T} & pupillo\\
+\sneume{to!cl!cl!cl} & \texttt{to!cl!cl!cl} & \texttt{C64Q} & sepavit,\\
+\sneume{to!cl!po} & \texttt{to!cl!po} & \texttt{E31T} & veritas & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{to!cl!po-1} & \texttt{to!cl!po-1} & \texttt{N100T} & veritas\\
+\sneume{to!cl!pi} & \texttt{to!cl!pi} & \texttt{C45S} & mea\\
+\sneume{to!cl-} & \texttt{to!cl-} & \texttt{N86D} & propterea\\
+\sneume{to!cl-!cl-} & \texttt{to!cl-!cl-} & \texttt{C54A} & Adducentur\\
+\sneume{to!cl-1} & \texttt{to!cl-1} & \texttt{C45S} & filiis\\
+\sneume{to!clS} & \texttt{to!clS} & \texttt{C43A} & terram.\\
+\sneume{to!cl!cl} & \texttt{to!cl!cl} & \texttt{C43A} & Domini,\\
+\sneume{to!po} & \texttt{to!po} & \texttt{C64Q} & sagitta\\
+\sneume{to!pr} & \texttt{to!pr} & \texttt{G11V} & Deo & \fbox{0.85x}\\
+\sneume{to!pi} & \texttt{to!pi} & \texttt{C60C} & tui.\\
+\sneume{toSsu2} & \texttt{toSsu2} & \texttt{H72H} & mihi\\
+\sneume{pf!cl-} & \texttt{pf!cl-} & \texttt{G51I} & meus\\
+\sneume{pf!clM-} & \texttt{pf!clM-} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{pf!clM-ppt1} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{pf!clM-ppt1} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{pf!pr} & \texttt{pf!pr} & \texttt{G9A} & Alleluia\\
+\sneume{cl!po>} & \texttt{cl!po>} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{cl!po>ppt1} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{cl!po>ppt1} minus tractulus}\\
+\sneume{cl!cl>1} & \texttt{cl!cl>1} & \texttt{N67G} & mundi\\
+\sneume{cl!clSsut2} & \texttt{cl!clSsut2} & \texttt{E256C} & psallite & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{cl!clS} & \texttt{cl!clS} \textit{Cf.} \sneume{cl!clSsut2} & \multicolumn{3}{l}{\texttt{cl!clSsut2} minus 2 tractulis}\\
+\sneume{cl!po} & \texttt{cl!po} & \texttt{C26A} & nobis.\\
+\sneume{cl!po-1} & \texttt{cl!po-1} & \texttt{H119C} & in\\
+\sneume{tr-1su2} & \texttt{tr-1su2} & \texttt{H73O} & dona\\
+\sneume{ci-pp2} & \texttt{ci-pp2} & \texttt{H73S} & magno\\
+\sneume{toS2su2} & \texttt{toS2su2} & \texttt{H73S} & eam\\ \hline
+\end{supertabular}
+
+\begin{supertabular}{llllll}\noindent
+& \multicolumn{4}{l}{\textbf{significative letters}} & \\
+\sneume{lsam} & \texttt{lsam} & \texttt{C87E} & abstraxisti & \multicolumn{2}{l}{altius}\\
+\sneume{lsal} & \texttt{lsal} & \texttt{E20E} & Sion, & altius mediocriter & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lsb} & \texttt{lsb} & \texttt{C39B} & Domino & \multicolumn{2}{l}{bene}\\
+\sneume{lsc} & \texttt{lsc} & \texttt{C27E} & eius & \multicolumn{2}{l}{celeriter}\\
+\sneume{lscw} & \texttt{lscw} & \texttt{C148V} & nostro. & \multicolumn{2}{l}{celeriter (wide form)}\\
+\sneume{lsco} & \texttt{lsco} & \texttt{C134B} & nomen & \multicolumn{2}{l}{coniunguntur}\\
+\sneume{lscm} & \texttt{lscm} & \texttt{C58A} & oblivio & \multicolumn{2}{l}{celeriter mediocriter}\\
+\sneume{lsd} & \texttt{lsd} & \texttt{E11C} & Virgo & deprimatur & \fbox{1.85x}\\
+\sneume{lse} & \texttt{lse} & \texttt{C84T} & adiutor & \multicolumn{2}{l}{equaliter}\\
+\sneume{lsew} & \texttt{lsew} & \texttt{H266D} & si & \multicolumn{2}{l}{equaliter (wide form)}\\
+\sneume{lseq} & \texttt{lseq} & \texttt{C64Q} & viis & \multicolumn{2}{l}{equaliter}\\
+\sneume{lsfid} & \texttt{lsfid} & \texttt{E16B} & Domino & fideliter & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lsfr} & \texttt{lsfr} & \texttt{C58A} & non & \multicolumn{2}{l}{frendor}\\
+\sneume{lsg} & \texttt{lsg} & \texttt{C27Q} & ovem & \multicolumn{2}{l}{gutture}\\
+\sneume{lsi} & \texttt{lsi} & \texttt{C87E} & Domine & \multicolumn{2}{l}{iusum}\\
+\sneume{lsim} & \texttt{lsim} & \texttt{E336I} & universa & iusum mediocriter & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lsiv} & \texttt{lsiv} & \texttt{E92I} & misericors & iusum valde & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lsk} & \texttt{lsk} & \texttt{C62M} & confidit & \multicolumn{2}{l}{klenge}\\
+\sneume{lsl} & \texttt{lsl} & \texttt{C38T} & Tecum & \multicolumn{2}{l}{levare}\\
+\sneume{lslb} & \texttt{lslb} & \texttt{C58A} & non & \multicolumn{2}{l}{levare bene}\\
+\sneume{lslc} & \texttt{lslc} & \texttt{E151A} & ab & levare celeriter & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lslen} & \texttt{lslen} & \texttt{C59D} & servitui. & \multicolumn{2}{l}{leniter}\\
+\sneume{lslm} & \texttt{lslm} & \texttt{C38T} & Tecum & \multicolumn{2}{l}{levare mediocriter}\\
+\sneume{lslp} & \texttt{lslp} & \texttt{E161S} & dicit & levare parvum & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lslt} & \texttt{lslt} & \texttt{E148L} & Laudate & levare tenete & \fbox{2.0x}\\
+\sneume{lsm} & \texttt{lsm} & \texttt{C38T} & principium & \multicolumn{2}{l}{mediocriter}\\
+\sneume{lsmoll} & \texttt{lsmoll} & \texttt{E33V} & fines & molliter & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lsp} & \texttt{lsp} & \texttt{C64Q} & altissimi & \multicolumn{2}{l}{parvum}\\
+\sneume{lspar} & \texttt{lspar} & \texttt{E104S} & miserere & paratim & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lspfec} & \texttt{lspfec} & \texttt{E2D} & fructum & perfecte & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lspm} & \texttt{lspm} & \texttt{C40V} & suam. & \multicolumn{2}{l}{parvum mediocriter}\\
+\sneume{lss} & \texttt{lss} & \texttt{C27E} & sanctos & \multicolumn{2}{l}{sursum}\\
+\sneume{lssb} & \texttt{lssb} & \texttt{C40V} & iustitiam & \multicolumn{2}{l}{sursum bene}\\
+\sneume{lssc} & \texttt{lssc} & \texttt{C84T} & Tibi & \multicolumn{2}{l}{sursum celeriter}\\
+\sneume{lssimil} & \texttt{lssimil} & \texttt{E193D} & ne & similiter & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lssimul} & \texttt{lssimul} & \texttt{E42A} & sumus. & simul & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lssm} & \texttt{lssm} & \texttt{C59D} & Si & \multicolumn{2}{l}{sursum mediocriter}\\
+\sneume{lsst} & \texttt{lsst} & \texttt{C87E} & Domine & \multicolumn{2}{l}{sursum tenere}\\
+\sneume{lssta} & \texttt{lssta} & \texttt{C27E} & Congregate & \multicolumn{2}{l}{statim}\\
+\sneume{lst} & \texttt{lst} & \texttt{C39B} & Domino & \multicolumn{2}{l}{tenete}\\
+\sneume{lstw} & \texttt{lstw} & \texttt{C58A} & non & \multicolumn{2}{l}{tenete (wide form)}\\
+\sneume{lstb} & \texttt{lstb} & \texttt{C39B} & Domino & \multicolumn{2}{l}{tenete bene}\\
+\sneume{lstm} & \texttt{lstm} & \texttt{E3D} & tu & tenete mediocriter & \fbox{2.166x}\\
+\sneume{lsv} & \texttt{lsv} & \texttt{E131O} & semper & valde & \fbox{2.0x}\\
+\sneume{lsvol} & \texttt{lsvol} & \texttt{C58A} & aeternum & \multicolumn{2}{l}{volubiliter}\\
+\sneume{lsx} & \texttt{lsx} & \texttt{C87E} & me: & \multicolumn{2}{l}{expectare}\\ \hline
+\end{supertabular}
+}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef-4_0_0-beta2.pdf b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef-4_0_0-beta2.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..63adfd5bdb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef-4_0_0-beta2.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef.lua b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef.lua
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e48041f92f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef.lua
@@ -0,0 +1,296 @@
+local P = lpeg.P
+local R = lpeg.R
+local C = lpeg.C
+
+local function sort_keys(table_to_sort, compare)
+ local sorted = {}, key
+ for key in pairs(table_to_sort) do
+ table.insert(sorted, key)
+ end
+ table.sort(sorted, compare)
+ return sorted
+end
+
+local function sort_unique_keys(tables, compare)
+ local set = {}, ignored, table_to_scan, key
+ for ignored, table_to_scan in pairs(tables) do
+ if table_to_scan then
+ for key in pairs(table_to_scan) do
+ set[key] = true
+ end
+ end
+ end
+ return sort_keys(set)
+end
+
+local EXCLUDE = {
+ ['.notdef'] = true,
+ ['.null'] = true,
+ nonmarkingreturn = true,
+ PunctumAuctusLineBL = true,
+ PunctumLineBL = true,
+ PunctumLineBLBR = true,
+ PunctumLineBR = true,
+ PunctumLineTL = true,
+ PunctumLineTR = true,
+ PunctumSmall = true,
+ FlexusNobar = true,
+ FlexusLineBL = true,
+ FlexusAmOneLineBL = true,
+ OriscusLineTR = true,
+ QuilismaLineTR = true,
+ VirgaLineBR = true,
+ SalicusOriscus = true,
+}
+
+local GABC = {
+ Accentus = [[\excluded{g}r1]],
+ AccentusReversus = [[\excluded{g}r2]],
+ Ancus = [[gec]],
+ AncusLongqueue = [[hfd]],
+ AuctumMora = [[\excluded{g}.]],
+ BarBrace = [[\excluded{,}\_]],
+ CClef = [[c3]],
+ CClefChange = [[c3]],
+ Circulus = [[\excluded{g}r3]],
+ CurlyBrace = '[ocb:1;6mm]',
+ CustosDownLong = [[j+]],
+ CustosDownMedium = [[m+]],
+ CustosDownShort = [[k+]],
+ CustosUpLong = [[f+]],
+ CustosUpMedium = [[a+]],
+ CustosUpShort = [[g+]],
+ DivisioDominican = [[,3]],
+ DivisioDominicanAlt = [[,4]],
+ DivisioMaior = [[:]],
+ DivisioMinima = [[,]],
+ DivisioMinor = [[;]],
+ FClef = [[f3]],
+ FClefChange = [[f3]],
+ Flat = [[gx]],
+ FlatHole = [[\excluded{gx}]],
+ Flexus = [[ge]],
+ FlexusLongqueue = [[hf]],
+ FlexusOriscus = [[goe]],
+ FlexusOriscusScapus = [[gOe]],
+ FlexusOriscusScapusLongqueue = [[hOf]],
+ LeadingOriscus = [[go\excluded{igig}]],
+ LeadingPunctum = [[g\excluded{igig}]],
+ LeadingQuilisma = [[gw\excluded{igig}]],
+ Linea = [[g=]],
+ LineaPunctum = [[gR]],
+ LineaPunctumCavum = [[gr0]],
+ LineaPunctumCavumHole = [[\excluded{gr0}]],
+ Natural = [[gy]],
+ NaturalHole = [[\excluded{gy}]],
+ Oriscus = [[go]],
+ OriscusReversus = [[go^^^^003c]],
+ OriscusScapus = [[gO]],
+ OriscusScapusLongqueue = [[hO]],
+ Pes = [[gi]],
+ PesQuadratum = [[gqi]],
+ PesQuadratumLongqueue = [[hqj]],
+ PesQuassus = [[goi]],
+ PesQuassusLongqueue = [[hoj]],
+ PesQuilisma = [[gwi]],
+ PesQuilismaQuadratum = [[gWi]],
+ PesQuilismaQuadratumLongqueue = [[hWj]],
+ Porrectus = [[geg]],
+ PorrectusFlexus = [[gege]],
+ PorrectusFlexusNobar = [[\excluded{e}gege]],
+ PorrectusNobar = [[\excluded{eo}geg]],
+ Punctum = [[g]],
+ PunctumCavum = [[gr]],
+ PunctumCavumHole = [[\excluded{gr}]],
+ PunctumInclinatum = [[G]],
+ PunctumInclinatumAuctus = [[G>]],
+ Quilisma = [[gw]],
+ RoundBrace = '[ob:1;6mm]',
+ RoundBraceDown = '[ub:1;6mm]',
+ Salicus = [[giOk]],
+ SalicusLongqueue = [[hjOl]],
+ Scandicus = [[gik]],
+ Semicirculus = [[\excluded{g}r4]],
+ SemicirculusReversus = [[\excluded{g}r5]],
+ Sharp = [[g\#{}]],
+ SharpHole = [[\excluded{g\#{}}]],
+ Stropha = [[gs]],
+ StrophaAucta = [[gs>]],
+ Torculus = [[gig]],
+ TorculusLiquescens = [[gige]],
+ TorculusLiquescensQuilisma = [[gwige]],
+ TorculusQuilisma = [[gwig]],
+ TorculusResupinus = [[gigi]],
+ TorculusResupinusQuilisma = [[gwigi]],
+ VEpisemus = [[\excluded{g}^^^^0027]],
+ Virga = [[gv]],
+ VirgaLongqueue = [[hv]],
+ VirgaReversa = [[gV]],
+ VirgaReversaLongqueue = [[hV]],
+ VirgaStrata = [[giO]],
+ Virgula = [[^^^^0060]],
+}
+
+local DEBILIS = {
+ InitioDebilis = [[-]],
+ [''] = [[]],
+}
+
+local LIQUESCENCE = {
+ Ascendens = [[<]],
+ Descendens = [[>]],
+ Deminutus = [[\~{}]],
+ Nothing = [[]],
+ [''] = [[]],
+}
+
+GregorioRef = {}
+
+function GregorioRef.emit_score_glyphs(cs_greciliae, cs_gregorio, cs_parmesan)
+ local common_glyphs = {}
+ local greciliae = {}
+ local gregorio = {}
+ local parmesan = {}
+
+ local function index_font(csname, variants, common)
+ local glyphs = font.fonts[font.id(csname)].resources.unicodes
+ local glyph, cp
+ for glyph, cp in pairs(glyphs) do
+ if cp >= 0xe000 and not EXCLUDE[glyph] and not glyph:match('^HEpisemus') then
+ local name, variant = glyph:match('^([^.]*)(%.%a*)$')
+ if name then
+ local glyph_variants = variants[name]
+ if glyph_variants == nil then
+ glyph_variants = {}
+ variants[name] = glyph_variants
+ end
+ glyph_variants[variant] = cp
+ elseif common then
+ common[glyph] = cp
+ end
+ end
+ end
+ end
+
+ index_font(cs_greciliae, greciliae, common_glyphs)
+ index_font(cs_gregorio, gregorio)
+ index_font(cs_parmesan, parmesan)
+
+ local function maybe_emit_glyph(csname, variants, name, variant)
+ local cp = variants[name]
+ if cp then
+ cp = cp[variant]
+ if cp then
+ tex.sprint(string.format([[&{\%s\char%d}]], csname, cp))
+ end
+ end
+ if not cp then
+ tex.sprint(string.format([[&{\tiny\itshape N/A}]], csname, cp))
+ end
+ end
+
+ local function emit_score_glyph(shape, ambitus, debilis, liquescence)
+ local name = shape..ambitus..debilis..liquescence
+ local char = common_glyphs[name]
+ local gabc = GABC[shape]
+ if gabc then
+ gabc = '('..DEBILIS[debilis]..gabc..LIQUESCENCE[liquescence]..')'
+ end
+ tex.sprint(string.format(
+ [[{\scriptsize {\bfseries %s}{\itshape %s}%s%s}&{\ttfamily\small %s}&{\%s\char%d}&{\%s\char%d}&{\%s\char%d}&]],
+ shape, ambitus, debilis, liquescence, gabc or '', cs_greciliae, char, cs_gregorio, char, cs_parmesan, char
+ ))
+ local emitted = false, i, variant
+ for i, variant in ipairs(sort_unique_keys{greciliae[name], gregorio[name], parmesan[name]}) do
+ if emitted then
+ tex.sprint([[\nopagebreak&&&&&]])
+ else
+ emitted = true
+ end
+ tex.sprint(string.format([[{\scriptsize %s}]], variant))
+ maybe_emit_glyph('greciliae', greciliae, name, variant)
+ maybe_emit_glyph('gregorio', gregorio, name, variant)
+ maybe_emit_glyph('parmesan', parmesan, name, variant)
+ tex.print([[\\]])
+ end
+ if not emitted then
+ tex.print([[&&&\\]])
+ end
+ end
+
+ local glyph_names = {}
+ local ambitus = P'One' + P'Two' + P'Three' + P'Four' + P'Five'
+ local majuscule = R'AZ'
+ local minuscule = R'az'
+ local debilis = P'InitioDebilis'
+ local liquescentia = P'Nothing' + P'Deminutus' + P'Ascendens' + P'Descendens'
+ local word = (majuscule * minuscule^0) - ambitus - debilis - liquescentia
+ local liquescence = debilis^-1 * liquescentia^-1
+ local pattern = C(word^1) * C(ambitus^0) * C(debilis^-1) * C(liquescentia^-1) * -1
+ local only_twos = P'Two'^1 * -1
+ for name in pairs(common_glyphs) do
+ local a, b, c, d = pattern:match(name)
+ if a then
+ table.insert(glyph_names, { a, b, c, d })
+ else
+ tex.error('Unable to parse '..name)
+ end
+ end
+ local function compare(x, y)
+ if x[1] < y[1] then
+ return true
+ elseif x[1] == y[1] then
+ if x[3] < y[3] then
+ return true
+ elseif x[3] == y[3] then
+ if x[4] < y[4] then
+ return true
+ elseif x[4] == y[4] and x[2] < y[2] then
+ return true
+ end
+ end
+ end
+ return false
+ end
+ table.sort(glyph_names, compare)
+ local first = true
+ local i, name
+ for i, name in ipairs(glyph_names) do
+ if not EXCLUDE[name[1]] then
+ if (name[2] == '' and name[4] == '') or name[2] == '' or only_twos:match(name[2]) then
+ if first then
+ first = false
+ else
+ tex.print([[\hline]])
+ end
+ emit_score_glyph(name[1], name[2], name[3], name[4])
+ end
+ end
+ end
+end
+
+function GregorioRef.emit_extra_glyphs(csname)
+ local glyphs = font.fonts[font.id(csname)].resources.unicodes
+ local first = true
+ local odd = true
+ for i, name in ipairs(sort_keys(glyphs)) do
+ local cp = glyphs[name]
+ if cp >= 0xe000 and not EXCLUDE[name] then
+ if first then
+ first = false
+ elseif odd then
+ tex.print([[\hline]])
+ end
+ tex.sprint(string.format([[{\scriptsize %s}&{\%s\char%d}]], name, csname, cp))
+ if odd then
+ tex.sprint([[&]])
+ else
+ tex.print([[\\]])
+ end
+ odd = not odd
+ end
+ end
+ if not odd then
+ tex.print([[&\\]])
+ end
+end
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef.tex b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..16a8c3c455e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/GregorioRef.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+% !TEX program = LuaLaTeX+se
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[titletoc,toc,title]{appendix}
+\usepackage{fontspec}
+\defaultfontfeatures{Ligatures=TeX}
+\setmainfont[
+ BoldFont=LinLibertineOZ,
+ BoldItalicFont=LinLibertineOZI,
+ SmallCapsFont=LinLibertineO,
+ SmallCapsFeatures={Letters=SmallCaps},
+]{LinuxLibertineO}
+\setsansfont[Extension=.otf,
+ BoldFont=LinBiolinum_RB,
+ ItalicFont=LinBiolinum_RI,
+ BoldItalicFont=LinBiolinum_RB,% fake
+ SmallCapsFont=LinBiolinum_R,
+ SmallCapsFeatures={Letters=SmallCaps},
+ ]{LinBiolinum_R}
+\setmonofont[Extension=.otf,
+ ItalicFont=Inconsolatazi4-Regular,
+ BoldFont=Inconsolatazi4-Bold,
+ BoldItalicFont=Inconsolatazi4-Bold,
+ AutoFakeSlant,
+ ItalicFeatures={FakeSlant},
+ BoldItalicFeatures={FakeSlant}
+ ]{Inconsolatazi4-Regular}
+\usepackage{enumitem}
+\usepackage{xspace}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{units}
+\usepackage{framed}
+\usepackage{url}
+
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\makeindex
+
+\usepackage[table]{xcolor}
+\definecolor{lightgray}{gray}{0.9}
+\definecolor{green}{HTML}{0c700c}
+\definecolor{myred}{HTML}{FF3333}
+
+\usepackage{minted} % must be after xcolor
+\newminted{latex}{gobble=1,bgcolor=lightgray}% Originally had 'gobble=2' but this creates problems on systems where the 2-space indentation is switched out for single tabs (Br. Samuel's, for one, does this). Should be set to autogobble once every developer is using TeXLive 2015 or later (as the autogobble feature doesn't appear in TeXLive 2014 or earlier).
+%\newminted{gabc}{bgcolor=lightgray} % can this be done?
+\newenvironment{gabccode}{\tt}{}
+
+
+\usepackage{gregoriotex}
+
+\usepackage{carolmin}
+\usepackage{mflogo}
+
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\hypersetup{colorlinks, citecolor=black, filecolor=black, linkcolor=green, urlcolor=green}
+
+\usepackage{longtable}
+\usepackage{multirow}
+\usepackage{pdflscape}
+\usepackage{hhline}
+\usepackage{listings}
+\directlua{dofile('GregorioRef.lua')}
+
+\newcommand*{\eg}{e.g.\@\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\nb}{n.b.\@\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\ie}{i.e.\@\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\etc}{etc.\@\xspace}
+
+\newcommand{\macroname}[3]{%
+ \vspace{3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}%
+ \makebox[\linewidth]{\ttfamily\bfseries #1#2%
+ \hspace{\fill}\normalfont\itshape #3}%
+ \vspace{1.5ex plus .2ex}%
+ \index{#1}}
+ %\addcontentsline{toc}{subsubsection}{#1}}
+
+\newcommand{\optional}[1]{{\itshape #1}}
+
+\lstset{backgroundcolor=\color{lightgray},
+ basicstyle=\small\ttfamily,
+ numbers=left,
+ numberstyle=\footnotesize,
+ stepnumber=1,
+ numbersep=5pt}
+
+% for the character tables
+\font\greciliae = {name:greciliae} at 1000000 sp\relax
+\font\gregorio = {name:gregorio} at 1000000 sp\relax
+\font\parmesan = {name:parmesan} at 1000000 sp\relax
+\font\greciliaeOp = {name:greciliae-op} at 1000000 sp\relax
+\font\gregorioOp = {name:gregorio-op} at 1000000 sp\relax
+\font\parmesanOp = {name:parmesan-op} at 1000000 sp\relax
+\font\greextra = {name:greextra} at 12 pt\relax
+\newcommand{\excluded}[1]{{\tiny\itshape #1}}
+
+\newenvironment{argtable}{%
+ \bigskip\rowcolors{1}{lightgray}{lightgray}
+ \begin{tabular}{clp{10cm plus .5cm}}
+ Arg & Value & Description \\
+ \hline}%
+ {\end{tabular}\bigskip}
+
+\setlength{\parindent}{0mm} % Default is 15pt
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{titlepage}
+ \begin{center}
+ \Huge
+ \textcolor{myred}{Gregorio} and \textcolor{myred}{Gregorio\TeX}:
+
+ Tools for gregorian score engraving.
+
+ \vspace{1cm}
+
+ \large Version \textbf{4.0.0-beta2},26 August 2015 %% PARSE_VERSION_DATE
+
+ \vspace{1.5cm}
+ \end{center}
+ \gresetlinecolor{gregoriocolor}
+ \def\grelowchoralsignstyle#1{{\cminfamily\small#1}}%
+ \def\grehighchoralsignstyle#1{{\cminfamily\small#1}}%
+ \def\GreStar{\greheightstar}%
+ \greannotation{\scriptsize{Comm.}}%
+ \greannotation{\scriptsize{VII}}%
+ \begingroup%
+ \color{black!60}%
+ \setmainfont[SmallCapsFont=AlegreyaSC]{Alegreya}%
+ \newlength{\mini}%
+ \setlength{\mini}{\hsize}%
+ \addtolength{\mini}{-4cm}%
+ \setlength{\fboxsep}{5mm}%
+ \hfill\fbox{\parbox{\mini}{\gregorioscore[f]{factus}}}\hfill%
+ \endgroup
+ \begin{center}
+ \vspace{1.5cm}%
+ \href{http://gregorio-project.github.io/}{Homepage}
+
+ Source code available on
+ \href{http://github.com/gregorio-project/gregorio}{GitHub}.
+ \end{center}
+
+ \vspace{2cm}
+\end{titlepage}
+
+\cleardoublepage
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\cleardoublepage
+
+\section{Gregorio\TeX{} Macros}
+The following sections document the macros available in the Gregorio\TeX{} package. The format is as follows:
+
+\macroname{MacroName}{\{Args\}}{Source File}
+Description of macro.
+
+\begin{argtable}
+ Arg \# & Data type & Description of argument\\
+\end{argtable}
+
+The source file where the macro is defined is included for developers
+who wish to consult it.\\
+Some of the macros intended for inclusion in the main.tex file by the user
+include usage examples.
+
+Macros are divided into three groups:
+\begin{description}
+\item[User Commands] These macros are meant to be used by your average user in their \TeX\ files in order to fine tune the appearance of their scores. They should have names which consist solely of lowercase letters and be prefixed with the \texttt{gre}. Where the name clearly identifies the function as belonging to Gregorio\TeX, the prefix may be omitted.
+\item[Gregorio Controls] These macros are written by the command line tool to gtex files and should not appear outside of gtex files. They should have names which are in CamelCase and be prefixed with \texttt{Gre}.
+\item[Gregorio\TeX\ internals] These macros are used by Gregorio\TeX\ to process and typeset a score and should not appear in a user's document anywhere (not even in gtex files). They should have names which are all lowercase and be prefixed with \makeatletter\texttt{gre@}\makeatother.
+\end{description}
+
+
+\input{Command_Index_User}
+\input{Command_Index_gregorio}
+\input{Command_Index_internal}
+\input{Gabc}
+
+\begin{appendices}
+ \renewcommand\thetable{\thesection\arabic{table}}
+ \renewcommand\thefigure{\thesection\arabic{figure}}
+ \input{Appendix_Font_Tables}
+\end{appendices}
+
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}
+\printindex
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Makefile.am b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Makefile.am
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0c971c18a05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/Makefile.am
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+# Copyright (C) 2006-2015 The Gregorio Project (see CONTRIBUTORS.md)
+#
+# This file is part of Gregorio.
+#
+# Gregorio is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# Gregorio is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with Gregorio. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+# GregorioRef.tex must be the first source file
+SRCFILES = GregorioRef.tex Command_Index_gregorio.tex \
+ Command_Index_internal.tex Command_Index_User.tex \
+ Gabc.tex Appendix_Font_Tables.tex GregorioRef.lua factus.gabc
+NABCSRCFILES = GregorioNabcRef.tex veni.gabc
+
+.NOTPARALLEL:
+
+# I know these rules look wrong, but they must not depend on anything that
+# gets generated or make distcheck will fail.
+
+GregorioRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@.pdf: $(SRCFILES)
+ $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) -C ../src gregorio
+ ../src/gregorio -o factus.gtex $(<D)/factus.gabc
+ TEXINPUTS=$(<D):$(<D)/../tex: LUAINPUTS=$(<D):$(<D)/../tex: \
+ TTFONTS=$(<D)/../fonts: PATH=../src:${PATH} latexmk -recorder -pdf \
+ -pdflatex='lualatex --shell-escape %O %S' \
+ -jobname=GregorioRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@ $<
+
+GregorioNabcRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@.pdf: $(NABCSRCFILES)
+ $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) -C ../src gregorio
+ ../src/gregorio -o veni.gtex $(<D)/veni.gabc
+ TEXINPUTS=$(<D):$(<D)/../tex: LUAINPUTS=$(<D):$(<D)/../tex: \
+ TTFONTS=$(<D)/../fonts: PATH=../src:${PATH} latexmk -recorder -pdf \
+ -pdflatex='lualatex --shell-escape %O %S' \
+ -jobname=GregorioNabcRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@ $<
+
+doc: GregorioRef-$(FILENAME_VERSION).pdf GregorioNabcRef-$(FILENAME_VERSION).pdf
+
+pdf-local: doc
+
+distclean-local:
+ latexmk -quiet -c -f -jobname=GregorioRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@ GregorioRef.tex
+ latexmk -quiet -c -f -jobname=GregorioNabcRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@ GregorioNabcRef.tex
+ rm -rf _minted* factus.gtex veni.gtex
+
+EXTRA_DIST = $(SRCFILES) $(NABCSRCFILES) \
+ GregorioRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@.pdf \
+ GregorioNabcRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@.pdf
+MAINTAINERCLEANFILES = GregorioRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@.pdf \
+ GregorioNabcRef-@FILENAME_VERSION@.pdf
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/factus.gabc b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/factus.gabc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b152d5a8219
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/factus.gabc
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+name: Factus est repente;
+office-part: Communio;
+occasion: Dominica Pentecostes ad Missam in die;
+book: Graduale Novum;
+mode: 7;
+initial-style: 1;
+user-notes: with choral annotations and episema from the non-diastematic neumes;
+annotation: Comm.;
+annotation: VII.;
+%%
+(c3) F<sc>Ac</sc>(e)<sc>tus</sc>(ei) est(i) re(i)pen(i)te(f[cs:t]) <sp>*</sp>()
+de(i) cæ(i)lo(h) so(kjk[cs:c]i)nus(i) (,)
+ad(i)ve(i)ni(ij)en(j[cs:t]i~)tis(ji__) spi(hj)ri(i)tus(h)
+vehe(h_f!gwh)men(hi~)tis,(g) (;)
+u(eh[cs:c]g)bi(h) e(iji)rant(hi[cs:t]h)
+se(h[cs:c]g)den-(fhg[cs:c]e~)tes,(fe__) (,)
+al(eg~)le(gv_/fhg)lu(ef[cs:t]e)ia:(e) (:e+)
diff --git a/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/veni.gabc b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/veni.gabc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a5ab3ab0b39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Build/source/texk/gregorio/gregorio-4.0.0-beta2/doc/veni.gabc
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+name: Veni Sancte Spiritus;
+office-part: Alleluia;
+mode: 2;
+book: Graduale Romanum, 1908, p. 249; Graduale Triplex, 1979, p. 253; Sg. 376 p. 296;
+transcriber: Andrew Hinkley, Jakub Jelínek;
+initial-style: 1;
+nabc-lines: 1;
+annotation: II;
+%%
+(f3)
+AL(ef~|ta>)le(fg/hggf|peclhgpi)lú(ef~|ta>)ia.(f.|ta-) (,)
+(ii//|bv-|gh!ivHG//|vi-hhppu2su1sut1|fhg/|to|eef.|pt) (;)
+(kxjj//|/////bv-|ikJI'/|pe-hhsu1sut1|ivHF.//|vi-su2sut1|giHG'E/|pe-su2suy1|ggf.|pr) <sp>V/</sp>.(::)
+Ve(e!fwg/|``qlppt1|hggf/ef|ci-or>peS)ni(f.|vi-) (,)
+Sanc(f|vi-)te(g!hwi|ql-ppt1) Spí(iv.//|vi-|hig/|tohh|hfg|cl-hhvi-hi)ri(gef|po-1)tus,(f.|vi-) (;)
+re(h|vi-)plé(gvFEf/ggf.|vi-su1sut1vi-hhpr-hh) (,)
+tu(f|ta)ó(hg|vi-)rum(hi|pe->) cor(i_|vi>)da(ghfg|vi-po-1hh) fi(g|vi-)dé(gf|cl-hh)li(ef|pehh)um:(f.|vi-hh) (:)
+et(g|vi-) tu(i|vi-)i(ij|pe) a(j|vi-)mór(kxkvJI'/|/////vi-hhsu1sut1|ivHF.//|vi-su1sut1|ghGF'/|pe-su1sut1|ef.,|pi|kxeg//i_j!kvJI'/ivHF.//|tahksaM-4hkvi-hisu1sut1vi-hisu1sut1|ghGF'/|``pe-su1sut1|ef.//|``pi|e!fwg'!hv|``ql-ppt1vi-hj)is(g.|//vi-) (;)
+in(gef|po-1) e(gf|cl)is(f.|ta-) ig(ef~|ta>)nem(f|vi-) ac(fg/hggf|pecl!pr)cén(ef~|ta>)de.(f.|vi-) (,)
+(ii//|bv-|gh!ivHG//|vi-hhppt2su1sut1|fhg//|to|eef.|pt) (;)
+(kxjj//ikJI'/ivHF.//giHG'E/ggf.) (::)